Controls

manual
CONNECT 2
Microchip and LCD display
electronic regulation and signaling
electronic module for liquid coolers
04 - 2021

and heat pumps

EN7593406-00
CONTENTS

1 - IMPORTANT RECOMMENDATIONS....................................................................................................................................... 5
1.1 - Electrical power supply........................................................................................................................................................ 5
1.2 - Board controller specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 5
1.3 - Warning................................................................................................................................................................................ 5
1.4 - Earthing................................................................................................................................................................................ 5
1.5 - Connection of sensors......................................................................................................................................................... 5
1.6 - Connection of communication buses and of the remote console......................................................................................... 5
1.7 -  Connection of on/off inputs............................................................................................................................................................... 5
2 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................................ 6
3 - COMPOSITION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 7
3.1 - Main control board for machines with one non-reversible refrigerating circuit..................................................................... 7
3.2 - Additional board 1................................................................................................................................................................ 8
3.3 - Additional board 2................................................................................................................................................................ 9
3.4 - Control and display console............................................................................................................................................... 10
3.5 - Connection via RS485 serial port for CMS or control console and Multi controller unit......................................................11
3.6 - Relay boards ......................................................................................................................................................................11
4 - DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................................................................................... 12
4.1 - Main board ....................................................................................................................................................................... 12
4.2 - Expansion (additional) boards 1 and 2 .............................................................................................................................. 12
4.3 - Man-Machine Communication........................................................................................................................................... 12
5 - ACCESS LEVELS.................................................................................................................................................................. 13
5.1 - Selecting an authorised access level................................................................................................................................. 13
5.2 - Accessing the various access levels ................................................................................................................................ 13
5.3 - Configuring access levels on the controller........................................................................................................................ 14
5.4 - Management of the numeric codes for accessing levels 2 and 3 ..................................................................................... 14
5.5 - Classification of the menus and their functions.................................................................................................................. 15
6 - LIST OF PARAMETERS......................................................................................................................................................... 16
7 - MANAGEMENT OF THE DRYCOOLER CONTROLLER PARAMETERS............................................................................ 25
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS................................................................................................................................................ 26
8.1 - MAIN menu........................................................................................................................................................................ 26
8.2 - SETPOINTS menu............................................................................................................................................................. 26
8.3 - MACHINE STATUS menu.................................................................................................................................................. 26
8.4 - Measured values menu...................................................................................................................................................... 31
8.5 - MACHINE PARAMETERS menu....................................................................................................................................... 32
8.6 - ADJUSTMENT PARAMETERS menu ............................................................................................................................... 36
8.7 - OPERATION PARAMETERS menu................................................................................................................................... 44
8.8 - FAULT MEMORY menu..................................................................................................................................................... 54
8.9 - TEST MODE menu............................................................................................................................................................ 55
8.10 - HP test per circuit (from version V27).............................................................................................................................. 55
9 - MANAGEMENT OF THE ON/OFF INPUTS........................................................................................................................... 57
9.1 - Automatic machine operation control................................................................................................................................. 57
9.2 - Load shedding control........................................................................................................................................................ 57
9.3 - Water flow switch............................................................................................................................................................... 57
9.4 - Fan fault (circuits 1 and 2).................................................................................................................................................. 58
9.5 - Expansion valve fault......................................................................................................................................................... 59
9.6 - Phase controller fault......................................................................................................................................................... 60
9.7 - Pump fault.......................................................................................................................................................................... 60
9.8 - Compressor protection....................................................................................................................................................... 61
9.9 - Manual HP pressure switch fault on circuit 1 or 2.............................................................................................................. 61
9.10 - Setpoint selection via on/off input..................................................................................................................................... 62
9.11 - Variable setpoint via 4 20 mA input.................................................................................................................................. 62
9.12 - Operating mode selection................................................................................................................................................ 63
10 - MANAGEMENT OF THE ANALOGUE INPUTS ................................................................................................................. 64
10.1 - Temperature sensor......................................................................................................................................................... 64
10.2 - Pressure sensor............................................................................................................................................................... 67
11 - MANAGEMENT OF THE WATER PUMPS........................................................................................................................... 69
11.1 - Pump 1............................................................................................................................................................................. 69
11.2 - Pump 2............................................................................................................................................................................. 69
11.3 - Pump management if P2 = 3 (reversible air-to-water) + heating mode + P111 = boiler................................................... 69
11.4 - Unseizing and switching the pumps ............................................................................................................................... 69
11.5 - Actuation of variable-speed pump 1 on water-to-water machines via the 0/10V output:.................................................. 70
12 - WINTER PROTECTION........................................................................................................................................................ 72
12.1 - Frost protection of pumps and heat exchangers while unit is off..................................................................................... 72
12.2 - Water loop winter protection............................................................................................................................................. 72

Translation of the original document

CONNECT2 EN-2
CONTENTS

13 - MANAGEMENT OF THE FUNCTIONS................................................................................................................................ 73

13.1 - Management of the compressor protections.................................................................................................................... 73
13.2 - Management of the time counters.................................................................................................................................... 73
13.3 - Management of compressor start-up............................................................................................................................... 73
13.4 - Compressor stopping sequence :.................................................................................................................................... 74
13.5 - Management of the reversing valves............................................................................................................................... 75
13.6 - Management of configurable output P111 :...................................................................................................................... 75
14 - SELF-ADJUSTING FUNCTIONS......................................................................................................................................... 76
14.1 - Self-adjusting function: water frost limit............................................................................................................................ 76
14.2 - Self-adjusting function: refrigerant frost limit.................................................................................................................... 76
14.3 - Self-adjusting function: HP pressure limit......................................................................................................................... 76
14.4 - Self-adjusting function: discharge protection, circuit 1 or 2.............................................................................................. 77
14.5 - Self-adjusting function: minimum HP, circuit 1 or 2.......................................................................................................... 77
14.6 - Self-adjusting function for high water return temperatures.............................................................................................. 77
15 - FAULT FUNCTIONS............................................................................................................................................................ 78
15.1 - Water frost limit fault on circuits 1 and 2.......................................................................................................................... 78
15.2 - Refrigerant frost limit fault on circuits 1 and 2.................................................................................................................. 78
15.3 - HP pressure fault, circuits 1 and 2................................................................................................................................... 79
15.4 - Discharge temperature fault, circuit 1 or 2....................................................................................................................... 79
15.5 - LP fault on circuit 1 or 2.................................................................................................................................................... 80
15.6 - Management of superheat faults...................................................................................................................................... 81
16 - CONTROLS.......................................................................................................................................................................... 82
16.1 - Main control in cooling and heating modes...................................................................................................................... 82
16.2 - Water temperature setpoint adjustment........................................................................................................................... 83
16.3 - Adjustment of water temperature setpoint if P7 ≠ INVERTER......................................................................................... 83
16.4 - Adjustment of setpoint for the water supply and return temperatures (P141 = 1 or 2) if P7 = INVERTER...................... 86
16.5 - Storage control................................................................................................................................................................. 88
16.6 - Control setpoint (P251) management.............................................................................................................................. 88
16.7 - Automated self-regulating control..................................................................................................................................... 89
16.8 - Control for bus connection to the Drycooler controller in FREECOOLING mode............................................................ 89
17 - CONTROL OF CONDENSING PRESSURE FOR AIR-COOLED UNITS............................................................................ 90
17.1 - Control during normal operation or on/off control............................................................................................................. 90
17.2 - Forced and self-adjusting control..................................................................................................................................... 91
17.3 - Fan speed control............................................................................................................................................................ 91
17.4 - Low Noise control (single-fan units only)......................................................................................................................... 95
17.5 - Total recovery control....................................................................................................................................................... 96
17.6 - Management of the air blades if P10 = Centrifugal.......................................................................................................... 96
18 - CONTROL OF CONDENSING PRESSURE FOR WATER-TO-WATER UNITS.................................................................. 98
18.1 - Operation with a two-way valve....................................................................................................................................... 98
18.2 - Operation with a three-way valve..................................................................................................................................... 98
19 - RESTRICTION OF OPERATION OF THE MACHINES BASED ON THE OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE........................... 99
19.1 - Restriction to the minimum air temperature in heating mode........................................................................................... 99
19.2 - Restriction to the maximum air temperature in cooling mode.......................................................................................... 99
19.3 - Restriction to the maximum air temperature in heating mode :...................................................................................... 100
19.4 - Restriction to the minimum air temperature in cooling mode :....................................................................................... 100
20 - MANAGEMENT OF THE AUXILIARY HEATER BOARD AND THE ELECTRIC AUXILIARY HEATERS........................ 101
21 - MANAGEMENT OF THE BACK-UP BOILER.................................................................................................................... 103
22 - MASTER/SLAVE CONTROL.............................................................................................................................................. 104
22.1 - Case of two parallel-connected machines..................................................................................................................... 104
23 - ACTUATION OF THE ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE............................................................................................... 108
23.1 - With Alco driver and display........................................................................................................................................... 108
23.2 - With VCM driver............................................................................................................................................................. 108
24 - IMPORTANT INFORMATION REGARDING THE CONTROL OF AN INVERTER COMPRESSOR..................................110
25 - DEFROSTING OF THE EVAPORATOR COILS..................................................................................................................112
26 - HOURLY PROGRAMMING.................................................................................................................................................113
26.1 - Presentation....................................................................................................................................................................113
26.2 - Definition of the programming stages.............................................................................................................................113
26.3 - Definition of holiday zones..............................................................................................................................................113
26.4 - Operation........................................................................................................................................................................113

EN-3 CONNECT2
CONTENTS

27 - MANAGEMENT OF A REFRIGERANT FLUID LEAK AND LEAK FAULT DETECTOR....................................................116

27.1 - Link between the CAREL detector and the controller :...................................................................................................116
27.2 - Management of faults when a leak is detected by the CAREL unit if P104 = YES :.......................................................116
27.3 - Management of faults if communication (bus) with the CAREL unit is lost if P104 = YES..............................................116
27.4 - Management of sensor faults in the CAREL detector if P104 = YES :............................................................................117
27.5 - Reading parameters :......................................................................................................................................................117
28 - MANAGEMENT OF ELECTRICAL POWER.......................................................................................................................118
28.1 - Management of load shedding on a power input threshold :..........................................................................................118
28.2 - Reading parameters :......................................................................................................................................................119
28.3 - Display in the Measured values and Machine status menus :........................................................................................119
29 - MANAGEMENT OF MAINTENANCE REMINDER DISPLAY............................................................................................ 120
29.1 - FGAS tightness check reminder :.................................................................................................................................. 120
29.2 - Maintenance reminder :................................................................................................................................................. 120
29.3 - Useful information for both functions :............................................................................................................................ 121
30 - COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL........................................................................................................................................ 122
30.1 - Registers accessible by customer.................................................................................................................................. 123
30.2 - Customer access bits..................................................................................................................................................... 124

The illustrations in this document are for illustrative purposes only and not part of any offer for sale or contract. The manufacturer reserves the right to change the design
at any time without notice.

CONNECT2 EN-4
1 - IMPORTANT RECOMMENDATIONS

Your unit is equipped with a microprocessor-controlled electronic 1.6 - Connection

 of communication buses
circuit board. To ensure the correct operation of your machine, and of the remote console
you must follow the rules listed below.
1.6.1 - Connection cable specifications
1.1 - Electrical power supply
- Flexible cable – RS 485 connection
Remote control: 230 V AC/50 Hz. - Two shielded wires
If the machine’s remote control is powered separately - Capacitance between cables and shield: 120 pF/m
(transformer not supplied), provide the following: - Resistance: 56 Ω/km

1 - A power supply line running directly from a distribution 1.6.2 - Connection of the shield
point (this line must be used only to supply power to the
machine’s remote control). - Connect the shield on the BMS or micro-computer end to
earth.
2 - This power supply line must be at least 1 metre away from - Ensure bonding all the way to the last unit
all power lines (400 V). - (the shield on the communication cable must be connected
between each unit).
1.2 - Board controller specifications - Do not connect the shield to the earth connection on the units.
Board power input: 35 Watts. - The wires exiting the shield must be as short as possible (2
cm) on each unit.
Maximum allowable voltage and current per input/output:
253 V AC -3.15 A. 1.6.3 - Cable routing
The board is powered by an onboard screw-on three-pin - The cable must be at least 30 cm away from all 230 V or 400
connector. The terminals are identified as follows: V cables along its entire length.
1 - Live, - If a 230 V or 400 V cable must be crossed with a computer
cable, they must cross each other at a right angle.
2 - Neutral,
3 - Earth.
1.7 - C
 onnection of on/off inputs
Board fuse specifications:
■ Distances of less than 30 metres:
Schurter UMT 250 V AC/3.15 A. Time lag: 10 × 3. Product code:
- Use a shielded cable. Keep the cable at least 30 cm away
34031 0171.
from all lines that could generate interference. Connect the
Environmental conditions: shield to the earth on the unit. If several shielded cables are
- In storage → 40/+80°C, 5/85% humidity without condensation. used, connect each shield separately (if the risk of interference
- In use → 20/+70°C, 5/85% humidity without condensation. persists, install a relay for each input).
Degree of pollution: 3. ■ Distances of greater than 30 metres:
- Install a relay for each input near the electronic circuit board
1.3 - Warning (cable cross-section: 0.5 mm2)
Read the instructions in the manual before attempting to service ■ Example connection diagram:
the product.
Before attempting to service the board, disconnect its power
source and make sure that no voltage is present.
To prevent the risk of electric shock, access to the board should
be impossible while it is energised.
Certain parts of the board (USB and Ethernet connectors) may
be hot. Based on the ambient temperature, they could cause
burns. As a result, avoid touching these connectors while they
are connected.
K : Auxiliary relay (fit near the electronic circuit board)
There is a risk of explosion if the battery is replaced
CA : Automatic operation control (on each machine)
by an incorrect type
Dispose of used batteries in accordance with local
regulations.

1.4 - Earthing
Compulsory (good earth quality in compliance with French
standard NF C 15-100).

1.5 - Connection of sensors

Keep connection cables away from power lines (400 V) or a
remote control line (230 V). In the case of distances of over 6 m,
use a shielded cable connected to the earth on the unit.
Maximum distance: 25 m.

EN-5 CONNECT2
2 - GENERAL

This controller is fitted as standard on water chillers (or water heaters) equipped with one or two refrigerating circuits and scroll
compressors. It is fitted on water-to-water, air-to-water and reversible air-to-water units.
Depending on the configuration, the board provides the following functions:
- Control of chilled water or hot water temperatures.
- Continuous monitoring of operating parameters.
- Diagnostics and fault storage.
- Setpoint drift based on the outdoor temperature (in heating and cooling modes).
- Communication with the console (remote or local) and the additional boards (fault reporting, BMS communication, Ethernet link for
PC).

CONNECT2 EN-6
3 - COMPOSITION

The controller consists of:

- One control and display panel fitted on the unit.
- One non-reversible circuit = one main board.
- One reversible circuit = one main board + one additional board (No. 1) → rotary switch in position 1.
- Two non-reversible circuits = one main board + one additional board (No. 2) two circuits → Rotary switch in position 1.
- Two reversible circuits = one main board + one additional board (No. 2) two circuits → Rotary switch in position 1.
+ one additional board (No. 2), two circuit changeover → Rotary switch in position 2.
- One auxiliary electric heater control board = additional board 1 → Rotary switch in position 2 (optional, ILD range).
- One remote console (optional).
- One relay board for operating states and faults (optional).

3.1 - Main control board for machines with one non-reversible refrigerating circuit

J11 J10 J9

3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

J7 J5
D50 D52 D46 D48
4321 4321

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J12

W3
J8 J6
J13

7531
8642
J14

+
PL1 SP1
TR1

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3

J2 J3 J4

SWITCH W3 TERMINAL BLOCK J4 (power supply)

Résistance fin de ligne pour liaison RS485 2 fils, le switch doit 1 230 V board power supply - Line
être positionné, sur la gauche pour le dernier appareil de la 2 230 V board power supply - Neutral
boucle et sur la droite pour les autres. 3 Earth
TERMINAL BLOCK J5 (on/off inputs)
TERMINAL BLOCK J2 (analogue outputs)
1-2 Motor fault, stage 1, circuit 1
1-2 0-10 V output 1 two-way valve or three-way valve if unit type
2-3 Motor fault, stage 2, circuit 1
(P2) = water-to-water.
4-5 Manual reset fault, HP, circuit 1
or circuit 1 fan speed if unit type (P2) = air-to-water
5-6 Expansion valve fault, circuit 1
or reversible air-to-water when P10 = centrifugal.
7-8 Phase controller fault
or air damper control if unit type (P2) = air-to-water
8-9 Water flow fault
or reversible air-to-water when P10 = centrifugal and P20 =
10-11 Pump 1 fault
yes.
3-4 0-10 V output 2 (Compressor INVERTER if P7 = INVERTER) TERMINAL BLOCK J6 (on/off inputs)
4-5 0-10 V output 3 (variable speed pumps). 1-3 Pump 2 fault
2-3 Automatic operation control
TERMINAL BLOCK J3 (on/off inputs)
4-6 Setpoint 1/setpoint 2 selection
1 Stage control common
5-6 Heating/cooling selection if unit type (P2) = water-to-water
2 Stage 1, circuit 1 control
or fan fault if unit type (P2) = air-to-water
3 Stage 2, circuit 1 control
or reversible air-to-water
or if P7 = INVERTER (compressor shut off order to driver)
7-9 Stage 1, circuit 1 load shedding control
4 Common for fans, heater and heat trace cable
8-9 Stage 2, circuit 1 load shedding control
5 Circuit 1, fan 1 control
10-11 Recovery control
6 Circuit 1, fan 2 control
7 Heater control TERMINAL BLOCK J7 (analogue inputs)
8 Heat trace cable control 1-2 10 K outdoor temperature sensor
9-10 Configurable control based on P111: 2-3 10 K water inlet temperature sensor, heat exchanger 1
- Max. power 4-5 10 K water outlet temperature sensor, heat exchanger 1
- Boiler 5-6 10 K hot water temperature sensor if unit type (P2) = water-
- Cooling/Heating to-water
11 Fault output common or exchanger amb. temp. if unit type (P2) = air-to-water
12 NC contact for fault output or reversible air-to-water
13 NO contact for fault output 7 +24 V power supply for pressure sensors
14 Common for pumps 8 0-10 V input for water inlet sensor on circuit 1
15 Pump 1 control 9 0-10 V input for water outlet sensor on circuit 1
16 Pump 2 or reversing valve control, circuit 1 10 Common for pressure sensors
11 4 20 mA remote setpoint
12 Setpoint common

EN-7 CONNECT2
3 - COMPOSITION

TERMINAL BLOCK J8 (analogue inputs)

432 1 432 1
1-2 Refrigerant temperature sensor, circuit 1 J3 J2
5 4 3 2 1
2-3 10 K suction temperature sensor, circuit 1
4-5 10 K liquid temperature sensor, circuit 1 J4

2 4 6 8 10121416
1 3 5 7 9 111315
6-7 50 K discharge temperature sensor, stage 1, circuit 1
7-8 50 K discharge temperature sensor, stage 2, circuit 1

J1
456

RC1
23
78
9 +5 V power supply for pressure sensor
901

10 0-5 V input - HP sensor

11 0-5 V input - LP sensor
12 Common for pressure sensors
TERMINAL BLOCK J9
Bus connection for chiller or MULTI controller unit
TERMINAL BLOCK J10
Remote control console, relay board bus connection – Drycooler
controller
TERMINAL BLOCK J11
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3
BMS link
J5 J6
TERMINAL BLOCK J12
Local console link
23
TERMINAL BLOCK J13 3.2.2 - Rotary switch set to position 2 - Use of

901
456
78
Link for additional boards electric auxiliary heaters
TERMINAL BLOCK J14
TERMINAL BLOCK J1
Ethernet link for PC
Flash Memory connector
On/off input specifications: 24 V - 15 mA
TERMINAL BLOCK J2
On/off output specifications: 250 V - 2 A Link with motherboard or another additional board
TERMINAL BLOCK J3
3.2 - Additional board 1 Link with another additional board
23 TERMINAL BLOCK J4 (on/off inputs)
3.2.1 - Rotary switch set to position 1 - One
901
456

78
1-2 Programmable input (P113)
circuit reversal use or recovery frost protection 2-3 Fault 1, electric stages
TERMINAL BLOCK J1 4-5 Fault 2, electric stages
Flash Memory connector TERMINAL BLOCK J5 (on/off inputs)
TERMINAL BLOCK J2 1 Common to all outputs
Link with motherboard or another additional board 2 Electric stage 1 output
3 Electric stage 2 output
TERMINAL BLOCK J3
4 Electric stage 3 output
Link with another additional board
5 Electric stage 4 output
TERMINAL BLOCK J4 (on/off inputs)
TERMINAL BLOCK J6 (analogue inputs)
1-2 Heating/cooling selection input if unit type (P2) = reversible
1-2 Available
air-to-water
2-3 Available
and number of circuits (P3) = 1
2-3 Available
4-5 Available
TERMINAL BLOCK J5 (on/off inputs)
1 Common to all outputs
2 Circuit 1 reversing valve control
3 Circuit 1 pressure balance valve control
4 Recovery frost protection heat trace cable
5 Reverse rotation control for fans
TERMINAL BLOCK J6 (analogue inputs)
1-2 Temperature sensor, coil A, circuit 1
2-3 Temperature sensor, coil B, circuit 1

CONNECT2 EN-8
3 - COMPOSITION

3.3 - Additional board 2

3.3.1 - Rotary switch set to position 1 - Two

23

TERMINAL BLOCK J6 (analogue outputs)

901
456
78

circuit use 1 0-10 V output for circuit 2 fan

TERMINAL BLOCK J1 2 Common for outputs
Flash Memory connector 3 0-10 V output for common fan, circuits 1 and 2

TERMINAL BLOCK J2 (on/off inputs) TERMINAL BLOCK J7

1-2 Motor fault, stage 1, circuit 2 Link with motherboard or another additional board
2-3 Motor fault, stage 2, circuit 2 TERMINAL BLOCK J8
4-5 Manual reset fault, HP, circuit 2 Link with another additional board
5-6 Expansion valve fault, circuit 2
3.3.2 - Rotary switch set to position 2 - Two
23
7-8 Load shedding input, stage 1, circuit 2

901
456
circuit reversal use
78

8-9 Load shedding input, stage 2, circuit 2

TERMINAL BLOCK J3 (on/off inputs) TERMINAL BLOCK J1
1 Common for stages 1 and 2, circuit 2 Flash Memory connector
2 Stage 1, circuit 2 control
TERMINAL BLOCK J2 (on/off inputs)
3 Stage 2, circuit 2 control
1-2 Heating/cooling selection input if unit type (P2) = reversible
4 Common for fan stages
air-to-water
5 Stage 1, circuit 2 fan control
and number of circuits (P3) = 2
6 Stage 2, circuit 2 fan control
2-3 Available
7 Stage 3, circuit 1 fan control if coil type
4-5 Available
(P11) = split
5-6 Available
or stage 1, common fan if coil type
7-8 Available
(P11) = mixed
8-9 Available
8 Stage 3, circuit 2 fan control
if coil type (P11) = split TERMINAL BLOCK J3 (on/off inputs)
or stage 3, common fan if coil type 1 Common for reversing valves
(P11) = mixed 2 Circuit 1 reversing valve control
3 Circuit 2 reversing valve control
TERMINAL BLOCK J4 (analogue inputs)
4 Common for balance valves
1-2 10 K water outlet temperature sensor, heat exchanger 2
5 Circuit 1 balance valve control
2-3 10 K manifold water outlet temperature sensor
6 Circuit 2 balance valve control
4-5 10 k refrigerant temperature sensor, circuit 2
7 Reverse rotation control for circuit 1 fans
5-6 50 K Discharge temperature 3 or 2 if 2 circuits and 1 stage
8 Reverse rotation control for circuit 2 fans
per circuit (P3 =1) (stage 1, circuit 2)
7-8 50 K sensor, discharge temperature 4 (stage 2, circuit 2) TERMINAL BLOCK J4 (analogue inputs)
8-9 Circuit 2 suction temperature 1-2 Temperature sensor, coil A, circuit 1
J4-10, J5-1 Circuit 2 liquid temperature 2-3 Temperature sensor, coil B, circuit 1
4-5 Temperature sensor, coil C, circuit 1
TERMINAL BLOCK J5 (analogue inputs)
5-6 Temperature sensor, coil D, circuit 1
1 Common
7-8 Temperature sensor, coil A, circuit 2
2 Available
8-9 Temperature sensor, coil B, circuit 2
3 +5 V power supply for pressure sensors
8-10 Temperature sensor, coil C, circuit 2
4 0-5 V input for HP sensor on circuit 2
5 0-5 V input for LP sensor on circuit 2 TERMINAL BLOCK J5 (analogue inputs)
6 0 V power supply, HP-LP pressure sensors 1-2 Temperature sensor, coil D, circuit 2
7 +24 V power supply for water pressure sensors 3 +5 V power supply - Available
8 0-10 V input for water inlet circuit on exchanger 2 4 0-5 V input - Available
9 0-10 V input for water outlet circuit on exchanger 2 5 0-5 V input - Available
10 0 V power supply for water pressure sensors 6 0 V power supply - Available
7 +24 V power supply - Available
J5 8 0-10 V input - Available
J6 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 9 0-10 V input - Available
J8 4 3 2 1

J7 4 3 2 1

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1 10 0 V power supply - Available
J4
TERMINAL BLOCK J6 (analogue outputs)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 0-10 V output - Available
2 Common for 0-10 V output - Available
3 0-10 V output - Available
TERMINAL BLOCK J7
Link with motherboard or another additional board
TERMINAL BLOCK J8
Link with another additional board
15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
J1

RC1
901
78
23

456

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

J2 J3

EN-9 CONNECT2
3 - COMPOSITION

3.4 - Control and display console

LCD

Confirm
button

Setpoint 1/
Setpoint 2 button Cancel
button

Heating/
Cooling selection
On/Off
button
button

General fault LED Reset Power LED

Circuit fault LED

The local console and the remote control console have the same front.

Mounting dimensions (in mm) of remote control console

235

35 153

Ø5
28

10

Ø 10
120

80

CONNECT2 EN-10
3 - COMPOSITION

3.5 - Connection via RS485 serial port for CMS or control console and Multi controller unit
CHILLER/ HEAT PUMP MULTI GROUP CONTROL
main board main board

3 2 1
Unit 2 B

J9
0V
Shield
J4 J3

3 2 1
To additional
4 3 2 1

J10
W3
J13

board 1 2 3 1 2 3
A B 0V A B 0V

3 2 1
J11
J12
1 2 3 4
Shield

Remote control console

RS-485 link to BMS
Local console (Modbus protocol)
230 V P
+10 % N Optional
Installed on unit -10 % T

A B 0V

Shield

W3
0V

1 2 3
B

J11
A

T 230 V

1 2 3
N +10 %

J4
P -10 %
J13
1 2 3 Main relay
Cables for EIA – 485 link board 1
(Compatible with RS485) To additional
UNIT relay board
ADD3
DRYCOOLER CONTROL board

W3 W4
3 2 1

J12

J4 J11 J9
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

Local console
N
230 V P

T
+10 %
-10 %

CHILLER/ HEAT PUMP & CHILLER

Starting from version V09.00, the
CONTROL main board
DRYCOOLER CONTROL connection, is
changing from J11 switch W3 to J9
Unit 1 A switch W4
3 2 1

B
J9

To additional
4 3 2 1

0V
J13

board Shield
A
3 2 1

B
J10
W3

RJ45 ETHERNET 0V
3 1

connection towards
J14
4 2

Shield
A
M to M or CMS
3 2 1

B
J11

J12 0V
1 2 3 4
Shield

RS485 PLC CMS or M 2 M

Local console

Installed on unit
Two-wire RS485, max. length: 1000 m
For connection to a CMS, refer to document 3991062

Identification of Modbus connection terminals

1 → A or +
2 → B or –
3 → Earth (shield).

3.6 - Relay boards

The dry contacts on the relay boards make it possible to remotely view the states of the stages that are on and all the fault states
on the unit.
For more information, see document 3991061 provided in the KIT

EN-11 CONNECT2
4 - DESCRIPTION

4.1 - Main board 4.3 - Man-Machine Communication

Main board for units with one non-reversible refrigerating circuit: ■ Local console:
■ Analogue inputs: - The controls on the local console are enabled regardless of
- Acquire signals measured by temperature sensors. the value of P103.
- Acquire signals measured by pressure by sensors. - Acknowledgment of faults is possible.
■ On/Off inputs: ■ Remote control console:
- Acquire operating state signals from surrounding - All parameters may be read depending on the authorised
electromechanical components. access level.
- All unit controls are enabled if P103 = remote or BMS.
■ Actions:
- In this case, the following parameters may be accessed for
- Comparison of setpoint and water temperature to calculate
modification:
which stages are to be turned on or off.
- On/Off.
- Management of the protections for the machine’s self-
- Cooling/Heating.
adjusting operation.
- All adjustment parameters are locked, depending on the
■ Outputs: authorised access level, except for the first 11 if P103 = local.
- Control stage control. - Acknowledgment of faults is not possible.
- Pump control. - Test mode is possible.
- General fault.
■ CMS:
■ The board also features: - All parameters (except P100, P103, P104 and P105) are
- An “end-of-line resistance” switch. accessible in read mode.
- All parameters (except P1 to P99, P100, P103, P104 and
4.2 - Expansion (additional) boards 1 and 2 P105) are accessible in write mode. However, access to
parameters P1 to P99 is possible when P99 is unlocked on
These boards are used for units with two reversible refrigerating
the machine’s local console.
circuits.
- Acknowledgment of faults is not possible.
They manage the inputs/outputs on the second circuit or required
NOTE : All the registers (see communication protocol)
for reversing the circuits.
appear regardless of the value of P103.
■ Analogue inputs: To enable write mode, P103 must be set to ‘remote or BMS’.
- Acquire signals measured by temperature sensors. To be able to switch between heating and cooling, P119 must
- Acquire signals measured by pressure by sensors. be set to ‘cooling/heating’ via the console.
■ On/Off inputs: To be able to switch between setpoints 1 and 2, P120 must be
- Acquire operating state signals from surrounding set to ‘2’ via the console.
electromechanical components.
■ Outputs:
- Control stage control.

Locking the console:

Available only on the local console on the unit.
The factory setting for the console is ‘unlocked’.
The lock status is saved in the event of a mains power failure.
If lock mode is enabled while modifying a parameter, any modifications made are aborted and the controller is reset to its initial
value.
To lock the console, simultaneously hold down the + and – buttons for 5 seconds (possible in any menu on the console).
The following message appears on the screen for 5 seconds then machine state reappears.

C O N S O L E
L O C K E D
All modifications from the local console are then inhibited.
Any attempts to make modifications will cause the above message to appear for 3 seconds.
To unlock the console, simultaneously hold down the + and - buttons for 5 seconds. The following message appears on the screen
for 3 seconds:

C O N S O L E
U N L O C K E D

CONNECT2 EN-12
5 - ACCESS LEVELS

The CHILLER/HEAT PUMP controller features three parameter access levels:

- Level 1: Users
- Level 2: Technicians/Maintenance
- Level 3: Manufacturer’s technicians (full access)

5.1 - Selecting an authorised access level

Authorised access levels are selected in menu 14 (ACC. LEVEL SELECT.). The following screen appears:

C O N T R O L L E R I N L E V E L X
1 4 - 1 A C C E S S T O L E V E L 2
1 4 - 2 A C C E S S T O L E V E L 3

- Level 3 provides automatic access to all levels (Manufacturer’s technicians).

- Level 2 provides access to levels 1 and 2 only (Technicians/Maintenance and Manufacturer’s technicians).
- Level 1 provides access to level 1 only (all users).

5.2 - Accessing the various access levels

5.2.1 - Restricting access to level 1 only

- Access level 2 is the default access level.
- If you are in a higher level and you want to restrict access to level 1 only, simultaneously hold down the ESC and OK buttons
for 10 seconds.
- No password is needed to access level 1. The setpoint adjustment range is + or – 5 K lower than in the higher access levels.
- The restriction messages remain displayed in access level 1. Operating messages in optimised mode are visible only in access
levels 2 and 3.
- Restriction of access to level 1 only is stored in memory in the event of a mains power failure.

5.2.2 - Access to level 2:

- A numeric code must be entered to access level 2:
- The following menu for entering this code appears when LEVEL 2 is selected:

L E V E L 2
A C C E S S C O D E
* * * *

- Using the + and – buttons, replace this first symbol (*) by the first character in the code and press Enter. Do the same for the
second, third and fourth symbols. When the last character is entered and Enter is pressed, the following menu appears:

L E V E L 2
N E W A C C E S S C O D E
* * * *

- To select a new access code, proceed as described above. When the last character is entered and Enter is pressed, the screen
displays the menu below followed by the main menu.

L E V E L 2
N E W C O D E S A V E D

- If you do not want to change the level 2 access code, press ESC to exit the new access code menu and go back to the main
menu.
- If you have changed your access code but have forgotten it, you can reset it to the original code by entering the LEVEL 2
ACCESS CODE menu and simultaneously holding down the + and Reset buttons for 10 seconds.

EN-13 CONNECT2
5 - ACCESS LEVELS

5.2.3 - Access to level 3

A non-modifiable numeric code must be entered to access level 3:
- The following menu for entering this code appears when LEVEL 3 is selected:

L E V E L 3
A C C E S S C O D E
* * * *

- Using the + and - buttons, replace this first symbol (*) by the first character in the code and press Enter. Do the same for the
second, third and fourth symbols. When the last character is entered and Enter is pressed, the main menu appears.

5.2.4 - Restricting access from level 3 to level 2

To restrict access from level 3 to level 2 only, go to the following menu:

1 4 - 1 A C C E S S T O L E V E L 2

Press Enter. The following menu appears:

A C C E S S T O L E V E L 2
O N L Y
Y E S / N O

To restrict the controller to access level 2, select ‘Yes’ and press Enter.

5.2.5 - Displaying the access codes on the controller after incorrectly entering the access codes:
- The digits in the access codes are replaced by the* symbol. When the + or - buttons are pressed, this symbol is replaced by
the digit 0. The digits in the code can then be selected using the + or - buttons.
The * symbol appears when the digit is confirmed by pressing Enter.
- The following message appears for 5 seconds if the access code is not entered correctly:

W R O N G C O D E

- When an access level is changed, the following message is displayed for 5 seconds:

A C C E S S L E V E L X

5.3 - Configuring access levels on the controller

- All three access levels on all the boards are accessible for a total of 20 hours of ‘on’ time after the controller is first turned on.
During this period any defective boards may be removed and their replacement boards configured and checked to ensure correct
operation of machine.
This time period will be automatically cancelled if a user switches to level 1 or level 2 before it ends.
When the time period ends, level 2 will be authorised unless the person commissioning the system chooses to restrict access
by the end user to level 1.
- If access level 3 is authorised in order to adjust the machine parameters and, for indeterminate reasons, it is left accessible to
all users, only level 2 access will be possible after a period of 4 hours.
- Commissioning of the machine can be prohibited simply by setting parameter P99 to ‘No’ in level 2.
Only those with the level 2 access code may re-enable commissioning of the machine.

5.4 - Management of the numeric codes for accessing levels 2 and 3

- Access to level 3 is direct for anyone with a PC running the program needed to communicate with the chiller/heat pump controller
and who connects to the board.
- Access to levels 2 and 3 is restricted to the manufacturer’s service technicians. Please contact your local branch.

CONNECT2 EN-14
5 - ACCESS LEVELS

5.5 - Classification of the menus and their functions

■ Level 1:
► Menu :
Setpoint, machine status, measured values, control parameters, operation parameters, fault memory, hourly scheduling,
communication and access level selection.
► Fonction :
all functions accessible via the console: On/Off, Reset, Heating/Cooling selection; Setpoint 1/2 selection
■ Level 2 :
► Menu :
all level 1 menus + test mode and master/slave operation
■ Level 3 :
► Menu :
all level 2 menus + electronic expansion valve

EN-15 CONNECT2
6 - LIST OF PARAMETERS

ACCESS LEVEL : 1 = Access to USER parameters (level 1 parameters only)

2=A  ccess to visible and editable parameters (level 1 and 2 parameters). EDITABLE numeric code.
3 = Access to Manufacturer’s technician parameters (level 1, 2 and 3 parameters). UNEDITABLE numeric code
Access
level

No. Description Setting Default Display conditions

configuration of the machine

3 1 Refrigerant type R407C, R134a, R404a, R22, R410A R410 A
1-Water-to-Water 2-Air-to-Water
3 2 Unit type 2
3-Reversible air-to-water
3 3 Number of circuits 1-2 1
3 4 Number of stages on circuit 1 1 ou 2 1
0 if P3 = 1
3 5 Number of stages on circuit 2 0, 1, 2 Hidden if P3 = 1
1 if P3 = 2
1 if P3 = 1, 1 if P3 = 1
3 6 Number of evaporators 1 if P3 = 1 and P2 = air-to-water 2 if P3 = 2
2 if P3 = 2
3 7 Compressor supplier Maneurop - Copeland - Inverter Copeland
- If P03 = 1 and P06 = 1, then P08 = EXL or
SWEP
- If P03 = 2 and P06 = 2, then P08 = EXL or
3 8 Heat exchanger suppliers EXL - Swep - Swep double - Alfa laval EXL SWEP
If P03 = 2 and P06 = 1, then P08 = ALFA
LAVAL or SWEP DOUBLE
3 9 Stage 2 shut-down time delay 1 to 10 s 2s Si P4 = 2
Centrifugal - Propeller – Available
3 10 Fan type Propeller Si P2 = 2, 3
pressure
If P3 = 2, P10 = pressure ,
3 11 Coil type Intertwined - Split - Mixed Intertwined P2 = 2, 3
3 12 Pressure balance solenoid valve No - Yes No If P2 = reversible air-to-water
3 13 Tandem type Balanced Yes/No Yes
1 if P3
(No. of
3 14 Number of coil sensors per circuit 1,2 or 4 circuits) = 1
2 if P3 = 2.
2 15,1 Measurement of electrical value Yes/No No
2 15,2 Electrical network type 1BL,2BL,3BL,4BL and 4NBL 3BL If P15,1 = Yes
2 16 Primary CT rating 5 to 1000 A in increments of 1 400 A If P15,1 = Yes
2 17 Secondary CT rating 1 or 5 A 5A If P15,1 = Yes
Option
2 20 All-season operation No - Yes Yes If P2 = 2, 3
1 - Without If P2 = 2, 3 P10 = Propeller
2 21 Variable speed drive 2 - With acoustic optimisation Without Value 3 accessible only
3 - With energy optimisation if P42 = VCM
2 22 Electric auxiliary heaters No - Yes No If P2 = 1 or 3
2 25 Number of pumps delivered 0-1-2 if P2 = 2 and 0-1 if P2 = 3 0 Visible if P2 = 2 or 3
2WV, Visible if P2 = water/water and P3 = 1
2 26 0-10 V configurable output V2V - V3V V2V 3WV, Visible if P2 = water/water
Visible if P2 = 3
2 27 Pump controlled by operation of boiler Yes/No No and P111 = Boiler
2 28 Master/slave control of two machines Yes/No No
2 29 Total recovery Yes/No No If P2 = 2
2 29,1 Frost protection during heat recovery Yes/No No
Breakdown
34
3 30 High pressure, HP 1 sensor 10 to 50 b (resolution: 0,1) 45 with R410A
-0,5
3 31 Low pressure, HP 1 sensor -1 to 10 b (resolution: 0,1) 0 with R410A
34
3 32 High pressure, HP 2 sensor 10 to 50 b (resolution: 0,1) If P3 = 2
45 with R410A
-0,5
3 33 Low pressure, HP 2 sensor -1 to 10 b (resolution: 0,1) If P3 = 2
0 with R410A

CONNECT2 EN-16
6 - LIST OF PARAMETERS
Access
level

No. Description Setting Default Display conditions

Option
Breakdown (continued)
34
45 with R410A
3 36 High pressure, LP 1 sensor 10 to 50 b (resolution: 0,1) 17,3 b if
P42 = VCM
-0,5
3 37 Low pressure, LP 1 sensor -1 to 10 b (resolution: 0,1) 0 with R410A
34
45 with R410A
3 38 High pressure, LP 2 sensor 10 to 50 b (resolution: 0,1) If P3 = 2
17,3 b if
P42 = VCM
-0,5
3 39 Low pressure, LP 2 sensor -1 to 10 b (resolution: 0,1) If P3 = 2
0 with R410A
3 42 Electronic expansion valve No/ALCO/VCM No
3 43 Superheat protection Yes/No No
3 44 Minimum superheat 0 to 5 K (resolution: 0,1) 0,5 K If P43 = Yes
3 45 Maximum overheating 10 to 20 K (resolution: 0,1) 15.0 K If P43 = Yes
3 50 SCP (runtime + off) 3 to 10 min. (resolution: 1) 5
145°C if Cop.**
135°C if Man.**
3 51 Discharge temperature limit 60 to 145°C (resolution: 1) 125°C if R410A
and P7 = Cop**
2 if P1 = R22,
4 if P1 = 407C,
3 52 Water line frost protection limit -25 to 6°C (resolution: 0,1) P52 ≥ 2 °C if P22 = Yes
R134a, R404 and 3 if
R410A
Δ for refrigerant frost protection limit/P52 10 Refrigerant frost protection limit = P52-P53, if
3 53 2 to 15 K (resolution: 0,1) 5 with R410A P08 ≠ SWEP DOUBLE
Δ for the frost limit on LP saturation temperature 7 if P7 = INVERTER If P08 = SWEP DOUBLE
27,5 if P1 =
R407C or R22
3 54 HP fault threshold 15 to 45 b (resolution: 0,1) 19 if P1 = R134a
24 if P1 = R404a
40,2 b if R410A
If P2 = 3: 0,5 b
If P2 ≠ 3:
(1,5 b if P1 = R22,
3 55 LP fault threshold 0,1 to 5 b (resolution: 0,1) R407C, R404a) and
(0,5 b if P1 = R134a)
2,5 b with R410A
3 58 LP slope factor 0 to 5 b (resolution: 0,5) 1 If P2 = 1, 2 or 3
0 if P2 = 1
3 59 Water outlet temperature slope factor 0 to 1 (resolution: 0,1) 0,5 If P2 = 1, 2, 3
if P2 = 2 and 3
13 if
R22-R407C
3 63 Minimum HP limit 5 to 25 b (resolution: 0,1) 8b with R134a If P2 = water-to-water
15 b with R404a
18 b with R410A
3 64 Optimised frost protection Yes - No Yes If P1 = R410A, P2 = 2 or 3
3 65 Delta T/Heat exchanger type 0 - 10 0 If P64 = Yes: confirm
3 66 Start-up time delay 0 to 300 seconds 120s If P7 = INVERTER
3 67 Oil warming time delay Yes/No Yes If P7 = INVERTER
3 98 Outdoor temperature sensor active Yes/No No
2 99 Parameter locking No - Yes No

** Cop. = Copeland ; Man. = Maneurop

EN-17 CONNECT2
6 - LIST OF PARAMETERS
Access
level

No. Description Setting Default Display conditions

Configuration Client
2 100 Language F - GB - D - SP - I F
2 101 Date DAy/MOnth/YEar
2 102 Hour HOurs/MInutes
1 103 Control type Local - remote (BMS) Local
2 104 Leak detection Yes - No NO
2 104,1 Leak detection time delay 0 to 5 min 1 min If P104 = Yes
Depending on control mode
2 108 Pump 2 control Depending on On/Off Visible if P2 = 1
Depending on On/Off if P2 = 1
15 to 90 seconds (resolution: 5 Visible if P2 = 1
2 109 Pump 2 ‘on’ time delay 15
seconds) and P108 = f (Control)
Max. power/Boiler/Cooling-heating /
2 111 Configurable output Helping on all faults on air-to-water P max
only
2 112 Number of electric stages 1 to 4 2 Visible if P22 = Yes
2 113 Configurable input Disabled/Load shedding/Override Disabled Visible if P22 = Yes
3 115 Exchanger frost detection enabled Yes - No Yes Visible if P2 = 1, 2, 3
3 116 Drycooler link Yes - No No
No permanent – Yes by on/off input
2 117 Power input limitation No P 15,1 = Yes
– Yes by bus
2 118,1 Maximum power level 15 to 400 kW 200 P 15,1 = Yes and P117 ≠ No
Setpoint Management
1 - Cooling
2 - Heating
3 - Cooling/heating via console If P2 = 1 or 3 = All
1 119 Operating mode Cooling
4 - Cooling/heating via on/off input If P2 = 2 = Cooling only
5 - Automatic cooling/heating based
on outdoor temperature
1 - 2 via console - 2 via on/off input -
1 120 Number of setpoints 3 Setpoint managed by 4 20 mA 1
signal
1 121 Cooling setpoint 1 P52 + 1 K at 30°C (resolution: 0,1) 20 If P2 = 1, 2 or 3 P119 ≠ Heating
1 122 Cooling setpoint 2 P52 + 1 K at 30°C (resolution: 0,1) 15 If P120 = 2, P2 = 1, 2 or 3,
1 123 Heating setpoint 1 20 to 60°C (resolution: 0,1) 25 P119 ≠ Heating
1 124 Heating setpoint 2 20 to 60°C (resolution: 0,1) 20 P119 ≠ Cooling
1 125,1 Low setpoint (4 20 mA) during cooling: P52 + 3 K at 30°C P52 + 3 Displayed if P120 = 3 and in cooling mode
1 125,2 Low setpoint (4 20 mA) during heating: 10 to 60°C 20 Displayed if P120 = 3 and in heating mode
P125,1 ± 5 K at 30°C with minimum
1 126,1 High setpoint (4 20 mA) in cooling mode: 20 Displayed if P120 = 3 and in cooling mode
value of P52 + 3
P125,2 ± 5 K at 60°C with minimum
1 126,2 High setpoint (4 20 mA) in heating mode: 40 Displayed if P120 = 3 and in heating mode
value of 10°C.
1 127 Cooling setpoint adjustment = f (out. temp.) No - Yes Yes If P2 = 1, 2 or 3 and P119 ≠ Heating
1 128 Outdoor temperature at start of drift 20 to 55°C (resolution: 1) 25 If P127 = Yes
1 129 Outdoor temperature at end of drift P128 + 5 K at 60°C (resolution: 1) 35 If P127 = Yes
1 130 Maximum setpoint at end of drift P52 + 1 K at 30°C (resolution: 0,1) 10 If P127 = Yes
1 131 Heating setpoint adjustment = f (out. temp.) No - Yes Yes If P2 = 1 or 3 and P119 ≠ Cooling
1 132 Outdoor temperature at start of drift 20 to 55°C (resolution: 1) 16 If P131 = Yes
1 133 Outdoor temperature at end of drift -25 to P132 - 5 K (resolution: 1) -7 If P131 = Yes
Highest setpoint if P120 ≠ 1 or
1 134 Maximum setpoint at end of drift setpoint if P120 = 1 at 60°C 45 If P131 = Yes
(resolution: 0,1)
1 135 Minimum boiler drift setpoint 30 to 55°C 50°C If P111 = Boiler
136 Maximum air temperature in automatic heating
1 - 5 to 25°C (resolution 1) 16 If P119 = 5
mode
1 137 Minimum air temperature in automatic cooling mode P136 + 2 to 40°C (resolution: 1) 20 If P119 = 5

CONNECT2 EN-18
6 - LIST OF PARAMETERS
Access
level

No. Description Setting Default Display conditions

Control
1- Return
2 141 Control mode 3- Water supply 1
4- Supply with compensation
Visible if P2 = 1 and P141 = 1 and heating
mode
2 142 Water loop winter protection No - Yes NO Visible if P2 = 1 and cooling mode
Visible if P2 = 2 or 3
2 If P141 = 1, 2
2 143 Stage differential 0,5 to 5 K (resolution: 0,5) 1,5 if P7 = INVERTER
2 144 Interstage differential 0,5 to 5 K (resolution: 0,5) 1,5
Supply with compensation by return
2 145 P coefficient 0,3 to 2 (resolution: 0,1) 1 If P141 = 3, 4 and P7 ≠ INVERTER
2 146 I coefficient 0 to 1 (resolution: 0,1) 0 If P141 = 3, 4 and P7 ≠ INVERTER
2 147 D coefficient 0 to 1 (resolution: 0,1) 0 If P141 = 3, 4 and P7 ≠ INVERTER
2 148 T coefficient 10 to 240 seconds (resolution: 10) 60 If P141 = 3, 4 and P7 ≠ INVERTER
2 150 Compensation of coefficient 0,1 to 1 (resolution: 0,1) 0,5 If P141 = 4
2 151 Compensation of time 5 to P148-2 (resolution: 1) 10 If P141 = 4
For storage control
3 154 Storage Yes/No No If P119 ≠ 2, P120 ≠ 1 and P120 ≠ 4
3 155 ΔT of control 0,5 to 10°C (resolution: 0,5) 5 If P154 = Yes
Defrosting
3 157 Temperature at start of defrosting -5 to 0°C (resolution: 0,5) -2 If P2 = 3
15 if R407C
3 158 Temperature at end of defrosting 10 to 30°C (resolution: 1) If P2 = 3
otherwise 25
3 159 Frosting time calculation Fixed time Optimised Optimised If P2 = 3
3 160 Fixed time 30-45-60 45 If P2 = 3
3 161 Coil frosting factor 0 to 2 (resolution: 0.01) 0,3 If P159 = Optimised
3 162 ΔT correction based on outdoor temperature 0 to 1 (resolution: 0.01) 0,2 If P159 = Optimised
P2 = 3
3 163 CP off time delay for defrosting cycle 0 to 5 min. 60 s if P7 ≠ INVERTER
3 164 ΔP defrosting HP interlocking fan 1 to 20 b (resolution: 0,5) 2 If P2 = 3, (P HPR = P54 - P164)
3 165 DHP differential 1 to 5 b (resolution: 0,5) 2 If P2 = 3
3 166 Defrosting HP control coefficient 1 to 5 b (resolution:1) 3 If P21 ≠ 1
Charge limit
2 171 Maximum return temperature, stage 2 20 to 50°C (resolution: 1) 35 If P4 + P5 ≥ 2 and P119 ≠ Heating
Fan management
1 si P3 = 1
2 si P3 = 2 et
1 to 2 if P3 = 1 P11 = imbriqué
2 to 4 if P3 = 2 and P11 = intertwined Visible if P2 = 2 or 3 +
2 180 Number of HP control stages per circuit 2 si P3 = 2 et
2 or 3 if P3 = 2 and P11 = split P10 = propeller
P11 = séparé
3 if P3 = 2 and P11 = mixed 3 si P3 = 2 et
P11 = mixte
12 to 17 b (resolution: 0,5) if P1 =
R407C or R22
14 to 20 b (resolution: 0,5) if P1 = 12
R404a Visible if P2 = 3 or P2 = 2 +
2 181 HP control setpoint 7 to 13 b (resolution: 0,5) if P1 = 14 P10 = propeller
R134a 7
19 to 27 b (resolution: 0,5) if P1 = 19
R410A
13,4 to 27 b if P7 = INVERTER
Visible if P2 = 3 or 2
2 182 Outdoor air temperature, forced HP 10 to 40 (resolution: 1) 25 + P10 = propeller
Visible if P2 = 3 or 2
2 183 Stage differential, HP control 2 to 8 b (resolution: 0,5) 4 + P10 = propeller
Visible if P2 = 3 or 2
0,5 to 3 (resolution: 0,5) 1
2 184 Interstage differential, HP control + P10 = propeller
2 to 4 (resolution: 0,5) 3 If P180 = 1 (Low noise function)

EN-19 CONNECT2
6 - LIST OF PARAMETERS
Access
level

No. Description Setting Default Display conditions

High Pressure Control

If P1 = R410A and P2 = 2, 3 or 4 and P180 =
3 191 Low Noise operation Yes - No No 1
8.0 - If P7 ≠ Inverter and P10 = Pressure
2 192 Max. fan speed threshold 5 to 10 V 5,6 V if P7 = (P21 = 2 or 3, P180 = 1 and hidden)
INVERTER If P7 = Inverter and P21 = Yes
8 if P21 = 1
3 193 Shifting of HP setpoint during total recovery 5 to 14 (resolution: 0,5) If P29 = Yes
12 if P21 = 2 or 3
3 195 ΔP for power reduction 0,1 to 1 b (resolution: 0,1) 0,3 If P4 = P5 ≠ 1
1 Visible if P2 = 3 or 2 +
3 196 ΔP return to normal condensation control 0,1 to 2 b (resolution: 0,1) 1,5 with R410A P10 = propeller
19 to 28 if P26 = 2WV 19b Visible if P2 = Water-to-Water and P3 = 1
2 197 Value at 0 V Visible if P2 = Water-to-Water
10 to 25°C if P26 = 3WV 20°C
28 to 39 if P26 = 2WV 28b Visible if P2 = Water-to-Water and P3 = 1
2 198 Value at 10 V 25 at 40°C if P26 = 3WV 30°C Visible if P2 = Water-to-Water
Limits
If cooling and P142 = Yes
3 220 Outdoor temperature, unit winter protection 2 to 10°C (resolution: 1) 2 If P2 = Air-to-water
Outdoor temperature differential, unit winter If cooling and P142 = Yes
3 222 1 to 10 K (resolution: 1) 2
protection If P2 = Air-to-water
-10 If P119 ≠ cooling and P2 = 3
3 225 Minimum outdoor air temperature in Heating mode -25 to 5°C (resolution: 1) -20 If P7= INVERTER
3 225,1 Maximum outdoor air temperature in Cooling mode 35 to 50°C (resolution: 1) DISABLED
if P2 = water-to-water and reversible
3 225,2 Maximum outdoor air temperature in Heating mode -5 to +25°C (resolution: 1) DISABLED air-to-water when P119 ≠ 1
if P2 = water-to-water and reversible
3 225,3 Température mini air extérieur en FROID 20 to +25°C (resolution: 1) DISABLED air-to-water when P119 ≠ 2
P225 at 25°C if P2 = 3 and P119 ≠
Outdoor temperature cooling
3 226 5 (resolution: 1)
Boiler operation authorisation 20 to 25°C if P2 = 1 and P119 ≠
cooling
2 230 On authorisation, stage 1 circuit 1 No - Yes Yes
2 231 On authorisation, stage 2 circuit 1 No - Yes Yes If P4 = 2
2 232 On authorisation, stage 1 circuit 2 No - Yes Yes If P3 = 2
2 233 On authorisation, stage 2 circuit 2 No - Yes Yes If P5 = 2, P3 = 2
2 235 On authorisation, electric stage 1 No - Yes Yes If P22 = Yes
2 236 On authorisation, electric stage 2 No - Yes Yes If P22 = Yes
2 237 On authorisation, electric stage 3 No - Yes Yes If P22 = Yes
2 238 On authorisation, electric stage 4 No - Yes Yes If P22 = Yes and P112 = 4
Read-only
1 250 LED test
1 251 Control setpoint If P141 ≠ 5 and ≠ 6
1 252 Outdoor air temperature
1 255 Water inlet temperature, heat exchanger 1
1 256 Water outlet temperature, heat exchanger 1
1 257 Hot water inlet temp., condenser If P2 = 1 and P141 = 1
1 258 Hot water outlet temp., condenser If P2 = 1 and P141 = 3
Refrigerant temperature, circuit 1 coils If P2 = 3
1 259 A-B If P2 = 3 and P14 = 2
C-D If P2 = 3 and P14 = 4
1 260 Refrigerant temperature, heat exchanger 1 If P2 = 1 or 2
1 261 Manifold water outlet temperature If P6 = 2 - P2 = 1, 2 or 3
1 262 Water outlet temperature, heat exchanger 2 If P6 = 2
Refrigerant temperature, circuit 2 coils If P2 = 3 and P3 = 2
1 263 A-B If P2 = 3 and P3 = 2 and P14 = 2
C-D If P2 = 3 and P3 = 2 and P14 = 4
1 264 Refrigerant temperature, heat exchanger 2 If P2 = 1 or 2 and if P6 = 2
1 265 Exchanger ambient temperature If P2 = Air-to-water
1 266 Calculated frosting time, circuit 1 If P2 = 3,
1 267 Calculated frosting time, circuit 2 If P2 = 3 and P3 = 2

CONNECT2 EN-20
6 - LIST OF PARAMETERS
Access
level

No. Description Setting Default Display conditions

Read-only (continued)
1 268 Value of reference ΔT for defrosting of circuit 1 If P159 = Optimised
1 269 Value of reference ΔT for defrosting of circuit 2 If P159 = Optimised and P3 = 2
1 270 Controller action time delay
1 271 DHP on differential If P2 = 3
1 273,1 Supply voltage If P15,1 = Yes
1 274,1 Machine current input If P15,1 = Yes
1 275,1 Machine power input If P15,1 = Yes
1 276,1 Electrical power consumed If P15,1 = Yes
1 285 Runtime in heating mode If P119 ≠ Cooling
1 286 Runtime in cooling mode If P119 ≠ Heating
1 287 Pump 1 runtime (in hours)
1 288 Pump 2 runtime (in hours) If (P2 = 1) or P25 = 2
1 289 No. of times P99 set to "No"
Visible if (cooling and P2 = 1) or
1 290 No. of water flow cut-offs in 1 hour if P2 = 3 or if P2 = 2 and P25 ≠ 2
1 291 Leak detected in circuit 1 Visible if P104 = Yes
1 291,1 Leak detected in circuit 2 Visible if P104 = Yes
Circuit 1
1 300 Circuit 1 HP
1 300,1 Circuit 1 HP control setpoint If P3 = 1 or 2 and P11 = Intertwined
1 301 Circuit 1 condensation temperature See appendix
1 302,1 Discharge temperature 1
1 302,2 Discharge temperature 2 If P4 = 2
1 303,1 Desuperheat on discharge 1 P302,1 - P301
1 303,2 Desuperheat on discharge 2 P302,2 - P301 If P4 = 2
1 304 Circuit 1 LP
1 305 Circuit 1 evaporation temperature See appendix
1 306 Circuit 1 suction temperature °C
1 307 Circuit 1 superheat °C
1 308 Number of HP1 cut-offs in 24 hours
1 309 Number of LP1 cut-offs in 24 hours
1 310 Number of starts, stage 1, circuit 1
1 311 Runtime (in hours), stage 1, circuit 1
1 312 SCP, stage 1, circuit 1
1 313 Number of starts, stage 2, circuit 1 If P4 = 2
1 314 Runtime (in hours), stage 2, circuit 1 If P4 = 2
1 315 SCP, stage 2, circuit 1 If P4 = 2
1 322 No. of water line frost protection cut-offs, circuit 1
No. of refrigerant line frost protection cut-offs, circuit
1 323
1 If P2 ≠ 3
No. of cut-offs caused by discharge temperature 1 in
1 324,1
24 hours
No. of cut-offs caused by discharge temperature 2 in
1 324,2
24 hours If P4 = 2
1 325 Opening of circuit 1 expansion valve % If P42 = VCM and P3 = 1
1 326 Circuit 1 liquid temperature °C If P2 = 1 or 2 or (3 + cooling mode)
1 327 Circuit 1 subcooling °C If P2 = 1 or 2 or (3 + cooling mode)
No. of cut-offs caused by C1 electronic expansion
1 328
valve fault in 24 hours If P42 = ALCO
Circuit 2
1 330 Circuit 2 HP If P3 = 2
1 330,1 Circuit 2 HP control setpoint If P3 = 2 and P11 ≠ Intertwined
1 331 Circuit 2 condensation temperature See appendix If P3 = 2
Discharge temperature 3 If P3 = 2 and P4 = 2
1 332,1
Discharge temperature 2 °C If P3 = 2 and P4 = 1
1 332,2 Discharge temperature 4 °C If P3 = 2 and P5 = 2
Desuperheat on discharge 3 If P3 = 2 and P4 = 2
1 333,1
Desuperheat on discharge 2 P332,1 - P331 If P3 = 2 and P4 = 1

EN-21 CONNECT2
6 - LIST OF PARAMETERS
Access
level

No. Description Setting Default Display conditions

Circuit 2 (continued)
1 333,2 Desuperheat on discharge 4 P332,2 - P331 If P3 = 2 and P5 = 2
1 334 Circuit 2 LP If P3 = 2
1 335 Circuit 2 evaporation temperature See appendix If P3 = 2
1 336 Circuit 2 suction temperature °C If P3 = 2
1 337 Circuit 2 superheat °C If P3 = 2
1 338 Number of HP2 cut-offs in 24 hours If P3 = 2
1 339 Number of LP2 cut-offs in 24 hours If P3 = 2
1 340 Number of starts, stage 1, circuit 2 If P3 = 2
1 341 Runtime (in hours). Stage 1, circuit 2 If P3 = 2
1 342 SCP, stage 1, circuit 2 If P3 = 2
1 343 Number of starts, stage 2, circuit 2 If P3 = 2, P5 = 2
1 344 Runtime (in hours). Stage 2, circuit 2 If P3 = 2, P5 = 2
1 345 SCP, stage 2, circuit 2 If P3 = 2, P5 = 2
1 352 No. of water line frost protection cut-offs, circuit 2 If P3 = 2 and P2 ≠ 4, 5
353 No. of refrigerant line frost protection cut-offs, circuit
1 2
No. of cut-offs caused by discharge temperature 2 in
354,1 24 hours If P3 = 2 and P4 = 1
1 No. of cut-offs caused by discharge temperature 3 in If P3 = 2 and P4 = 2
24 hours
1 354,2 No. of cut-offs caused by discharge T° 4 in 24 hours If P3 = 2 and P5 = 2
1 355 Opening of circuit 2 expansion valve % P42 = VCM and P3 = 2
If [P2 = 1 or 2 or (3 + cooling mode)] and P3
1 356 Circuit 2 liquid temperature °C =2
If [P2 = 1 or 2 or (3 + cooling mode)] and P3
1 357 Circuit 2 subcooling °C =2
No. of cut-offs caused by C1 electronic expansion
1 358 If P42 = ALCO
valve fault in 24 hours
Entrées
1 400 Automatic machine operation control Open/Closed
1 402 Setpoint 1/Setpoint 2 selection Open/Closed If P120 = 2 via On/Off control
1 403 Water flow check Open/Closed
1 404 Fan fault check Open/Closed If P2 ≠ 1 or 5
1 405 Cooling/Heating input check Open/Closed If P119 = Cooling/Heating via On/Off control
1 406 Phase controller Open/Closed
1 407 Recovery operating mode selection Open/Closed If P29 = Yes
1 408 Check of fault input for auxiliary electric heater 1 Open/Closed If P22 = Yes
1 409 Check of fault input for auxiliary electric heater 2 Open/Closed If P22 = Yes
1 410 Check of configurable auxiliary electric heater input Open/Closed If P22 = Yes
1 414 Check of override/load shedding input 1 Open/Closed
1 415 Check of override/load shedding input 2 Open/Closed If P4 = 2
1 416 Check of override/load shedding input 3 Open/Closed If P3 = 2
1 417 Check of override/load shedding input 4 Open/Closed If P5 = 2
1 418 Check of manual HP1 pressure switch input Open/Closed
1 419 Check of stage 1, circuit 1 fault input Open/Closed
1 420 Check of stage 2, circuit 1 fault input Open/Closed If P4 = 2
1 422 Check of manual HP2 pressure switch input Open/Closed If P3 = 2
1 423 Check of stage 1, circuit 2 fault input Open/Closed If P3 = 2
1 424 Check of stage 2, circuit 2 fault input Open/Closed If P5 = 2
Check of fault input for circuit 1 electronic expansion
1 425 Open/Closed If P42 = ALCO
valve
Check of fault input for circuit 2 electronic expansion
1 426 Open/Closed If P42 = ALCO
valve
Outputs
1 430 Pump 1 control state On/Off
1 431 Pump 2 control state On/Off If (P2 = 1) or P25 = 2
1 432 State of circuit 1 Y/C control output On/Off If P2 = 3
1 433 State of circuit 2 Y/C control output On/Off If P2 = 3 and P3 = 2
1 435 State of heat trace cable control output On/Off If P2 ≠ 1 (water-to-water)
1 436 State of heater control output On/Off If P2 ≠ 1 (water-to-water)

CONNECT2 EN-22
6 - LIST OF PARAMETERS
Access
level

No. Description Setting Default Display conditions

Outputs (continued)
1 437 State of recovery heat trace cable control output On/Off If P2 ≠ 1 (water-to-water) and P29,1 = Yes
1 438 State of maximum power output On/Off If P111 = Max. power
1 439 State of boiler output On/Off If P111 = Boiler
1 440 State of cooling/heating output On/Off If P111 = Cooling/Heating
On/Off if P21 = without
1 441 State of HP control output, stage 1, circuit 1 High Temperature mode/Low Noise If P21 = without, P2 = 2, 3
mode/Off if P191 = acoustic
If P180 = 2 and P3 = 1,
1 442 State of HP control output, stage 2, circuit 1 On/Off P2 = 2, 3
If P180 = 1 and P3 = 2,
1 443 State of HP control output, stage 1, circuit 2 On/Off P2 = 2, 3
If P180 = 2 and P3 = 2,
1 444 State of HP control output, stage 2, circuit 2 On/Off P2 = 2, 3
If P180 = 3 and P3 = 2, P11 = split, P2 = 2, 3
State of HP control output, stage 3, circuit 1 or
1 445 On/Off or
State of HP control output, common stage 1 If P180 = 3 and P3 = 2, P11 = mixed
If P180 = 3 and P3 = 2, P11 = split, P2 = 2, 3
State of HP control output, stage 3, circuit 2 or
1 446 On/Off or
State of HP control output, common stage 3 If P180 = 3 and P3 = 2, P11 = mixed
1 447 Driving voltage, stage 1, HP control 0-10 V If P21 = 2 or 3 and P11 = Intertwined
1 448 Driving voltage, stage 1, circuit 1, HP control 0-10 V If P21 = 2 or 3 and P11 = split or mixed
1 449 Driving voltage, stage 1, circuit 2, HP control 0-10 V If P21 = 2 or 3 and P11 = split or mixed
1 450 Driving voltage, common stage 1, HP control 0-10 V If P21 = 2 or 3 and P11 = Mixed
1 451 State of circuit 1 balance valve output On/Off If P12 = Yes
1 452 State of circuit 2 balance valve output On/Off If P12 = Yes
1 530 State of electric stage 1 On/Off If P22 = Yes
1 531 State of electric stage 2 On/Off If P22 = Yes
1 532 State of electric stage 3 On/Off If P22 = Yes
1 533 State of electric stage 4 On/Off If P22 = Yes and P112 = 4
1 535 Air blade percentage information 0-100 % If P20 =Yes and P10 = Centrifugal
1 555 CPU version number
1 556 Console version number *
1 557 Version number of circuit 2 board If P3 = 2
1 558 Version number of changeover board If P2 = reversible air-to-water
1 559 Version number of auxiliary heater board If P22 = Yes
1 560 Version number of circuit 1 expansion valve XX.YY VCM XX.YY If P42 = VCM and P3 = 1
1 561 Version number of circuit 2 expansion valve XX.YY VCM XX.YY If P42 = VCM and P3 = 2
1 570 "SO" order number" To be entered via a PC
1 571 MO number To be entered via a PC
1 572 Machine identification name To be entered via a PC
1 573 Machine identification number To be entered via a PC
Electronic Expansion Valve
Circuit 1
3 601 Circuit 1 valve type EX4 - EX5 - EX6 - EX7 - EX8 EX4 If P42 = VCM and P3 = 2
3 602 Circuit 1 superheat setpoint 0,5 to 30°C 6 If P42 = VCM and P3 = 1
3 603 Circuit 1 MOP point Yes - No No If P42 = VCM and P3 = 1
3 604 Circuit 1 MOP value + 5 to 25°C 15 If P42 = VCM, P603 = Yes and P3 = 1
3 605 Opening of C1 valve when air conditioning started 10 to 100 % 50 If P42 = VCM and P3 = 1
If P42 = VCM and P3 = 1
3 606 Opening of C1 valve when heat pump started 10 to 100 % 20 and P2 = reversible air-to-water
3 607 Opening time at start-up, C1 1 to 60 seconds 5 If P42 = VCM and P3 = 1
3 608 Circuit 1 slow mode Yes/No No If P42 = VCM and P3 = 1
Circuit 2
3 611 Circuit 2 valve type EX4 - EX5 - EX6 - EX7 - EX8 EX4 If P42 = VCM and P3 = 2
3 612 Circuit 2 superheat setpoint 0,5 to 30°C 6 If P42 = VCM and P3 = 2
3 613 Circuit 2 MOP point Yes - No No If P42 = VCM and P3 = 2
3 614 Circuit 2 MOP value + 5 to 25°C 15 If P42 = VCM and P609 = Yes and P3 = 2
3 615 Opening of C2 valve when air conditioning started 10 to 100 % 50 If P42 = VCM and P3 = 2

EN-23 CONNECT2
6 - LIST OF PARAMETERS
Access
level

No. Description Setting Default Display conditions

Circuit 2 (continued)
If P42 = VCM and P3 = 2
3 616 Opening of C2 valve when heat pump started 10 to 100 % 20 and P2 = reversible air-to-water
3 617 Opening time at start-up, C2 1 to 60 seconds 5 If P42 = VCM and P3 = 2
3 618 Circuit 2 slow mode If P42 = VCM and P3 = 2
Communication
1 700 Communication protocol BUS MODE BUS MODE
Adjustable: 4800, 9600 baud or 9600
1 701 Transmission speed 9600 baud
jbus
1 702 Parity Without, even or odd Without
1 703 Number of stop bits 1 or 2 1
1 704 Swapped real number format Yes or No Yes
1 705 Bus number 0 to 255 1
Master/Slave (2 machines) if p28 = yes
2 800 Master machine on loop Yes/No No If P28 = Yes
2 801 Backup machine Yes/No No If P28 = Yes
2 802 Switch backup machine Yes/No No If P28 = Yes
2 803 Name of backup machine Master/Slave Slave If P28 = Yes
CASCADE or PARALLEL or
2 804 Loop control type CASCADE If P28 = Yes
PROGRESSIVE
2 805 Machine differential 0,5 to 5°C 1,5 If P28 = Yes
2 806 Differential between machines 1 to 10°C 4.0 If P28 = Yes
2 807 Maximum differential, additional machine 1 to 10°C 0.0 if P801 = Yes
2 808 Time delay between machines 0 to 60 min. 1 If P28 = Yes
2 809 Machine 1 ‘on’ authorisation Yes/No Yes If P28 = Yes
2 810 Machine 2 ‘on’ authorisation Yes/No Yes If P28 = Yes
No
2 811 Pump turned off by control Yes, except for one No
Yes, machine off
Maintenance
2 900 F gas tightness check reminder No -03-06-12 months No
2 901 F gas check reset If P900 ≠ No
2 910 Maintenance check reminder No –in hours-in months No
1 to 9999 hrs 2000 hrs If P910 is in hours
2 911 Maintenance check frequency 1 to 99 months 12 months If P910 is in months
2 912 Maintenance check reset

CONNECT2 EN-24
7-M
 ANAGEMENT OF THE DRYCOOLER CONTROLLER PARAMETERS

Setting parameter P116 (Drycooler link) to “Yes” provides access to all Drycooler controller parameters in read/write mode only if
a bus connection has been created between the two items of equipment

1 3 - D R Y C O O L E R

- Menu 13 allows all information about the Drycooler controller to be displayed on the heat pump or chiller console without having
the console mounted on the Drycooler.
- The Drycool controller parameters are preceded by the letter A to differentiate them from those of the heat pump or chiller
controller.
- If a Drycooler equipped with its console is connected to a chiller or a heat pump and P116 is set to ‘Yes’, neither console has
priority over the other.
- If menu 13 remains open for 1 hour and no buttons are pressed during this time, the screen switches to the controller menu for
the chiller or heat pump.
- Parameter A99 (lock parameters) cannot be set to ‘No’ via the chiller or heat pump console.
- Parameter A116 (CW unit link) is not accessible via the chiller or heat pump console because setting A116 to ‘No’ will delete the
link with the Drycooler console.
- Parameter A250 is not accessible because the LED test on the chiller or heat pump console is performed via parameter P250
on the controller of said console.
- The forced fan operation function on the console is not accessible via the chiller or heat pump console.

EN-25 CONNECT2
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

The ° symbol stands for °C in the electronic programming system.

Analogue values are displayed with one decimal place. The hundreds digit may be replaced by a negative sign when appropriate.
A selection symbol flashes at the left of the display.
Holding down the + or - buttons will cause increasingly faster scrolling (and change the units) in the list of parameters or when
modifying parameter values.

8.1 - MAIN menu

Scrolling through menus occurs line by line.
The + button is used to increment values and the - button is used to decrement values.
The first square at the top left flashes.

1 - S E T P O I N T S
2 - S T A T U S O F M A C H I N E S

3 - M E A S U R E D V A L U E S
4 - M A C H I N E . P A R A M E T E R S

5 - A D J U S T M E N T . P A R A M E T E R S
6 - R E A D I N G . P A R A M E T E R S

7 - F A U L T M E M O R Y
8 - T E S T M O D E

9 - P R O G R A M M I N G
1 0 - E L E C T R O E X P A N S I O N V A L

1 1 - C O M M U N I C A T I O N
1 2 - M A S T E R / S L A V E

1 3 - D R Y C O O L E R
1 4 - A C C E S S L E V E L S E L E C T .

8.2 - SETPOINTS menu

This menu gives quick access to settings for the control setpoints depending on the control mode and the selected operating mode.

P x x x S T P 1 C O O L I N G
- x x . x °
P x x x S T P 2 C O O L I N G
- x x . x °
P x x x S T P 1 H E A T I N G
- x x . x °
P x x x S T P 2 H E A T I N G
- x x . x °
To move from parameter to parameter, press the + or – buttons. The letter P flashes when a parameter is selected.
To change the value of a selected parameter, press OK. The value can be changed when the cursor flashes at the bottom right.
Use the + button to raise the value, and the - button to lower it. When finished, press OK to confirm or ESC to cancel the changes.
When returning to menu 1 the last parameter consulted is displayed.

8.3 - MACHINE STATUS menu

To enter the MACHINE STATUS menu, use the + or – buttons to position the cursor on 2 then press OK.

CONNECT2 EN-26
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

8.3.1 - Main table

This screen reappears automatically after one hour if
No general faults occur, no controls are activated (via the console, modem, etc.), no general faults are reported and no automatic
controls are closed:

D D / M M / Y Y h h / m m
R E T U R N T E M P . : - x x . x °
S E T P O I N T : - x x . x ° ↓
1 O F F 2 O N 3 S C P 4 S C P
The ↓ aarrow appears if there is another message.
- If a general fault occurs on the main machine, the messages are displayed on lines 2 and 3 in the following order of importance
:

M A C H I N E O F F
W A T E R F L O W F A U L T

W A T E R F L O W F A U L T
X C U T ( S ) I N 1 H

M A C H I N E O F F
O U T T E M P . T O O L O W

M A C H I N E O F F
O U T T E M P . T O O H I G H

M A C H I N E O F F
P H A S E C T R L L R F A U L T

C O M P R E S S O R
If P7 = INVERTER
D R I V E R F A U L T

O U T . T E M P . S E N S O R F A U L T
If machine off
J 7 / 1 - 2

C O N S E N S E R I N L E T
S E N S O R F A U L T J 7 / 5 - 6

C O N S E N S E R O U T L E T
S E N S O R F A U L T J 7 / 5 - 6

M A N I F . W A T E R O U T L E T
If machine off
S E N S O R F A U L T A D D 2 J 4 / 2 - 3

E X C H . 1 W A T E R O U T L E T
S E N S O R F A U L T J 7 / 2 - 3

M A C H I N E O F F
O P E R A T I N G M O D E C H A N G E
If an automatic operation control is activated → the On/Off LED flashes:

M A I N T A I N W A T E R L O O P
T E M P E R A T U R E A T 3 0 °

W A T E R C I R C U L A T I O N
P U M P F O R C E D O N

U N I T S T O P B Y
R E M O T E C O N T A C T

M A C H I N E O F F
O N / O F F

EN-27 CONNECT2
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

8.3.2 - MACHINE STATUS table

This table appears only if any of the following messages must be displayed using the ↑and ↓ buttons.
The messages are displayed in the following order of priority:

M A C H I N E S T A T U S
F A N F A U L T

P U M P 1 O N
X X S

P U M P 2 O N
X X S

W A T E R R E T U R N T . L I M I T
P O W E R R E D U C .

E X C H A N G E R A M B . T E M P .
D U R I N G F R O S T P R O T E C .

N O . O F S T A G E S T O B E
S H U T O F F : X

U N I T D I S C H . T . L I M I T
O P T I M I S E D O P E R A T I O N

E L E C A U X C T R L
O U T T E M P . T O O L O W

W A T E R T E M P . R I S I N G
F O R D E F R O S T I N G

O U T . T E M P . S E N S O R F A U L T
J 7 / 1 - 2

M A N I F . W A T E R O U T L E T
S E N S O R F A U L T A D D 2 J 7 / 2 - 3

E X C H A N G E R A M B I E N T T E M P .
S E N S O R F A U L T J 7 / 5 - 6

H P P R E S S U R E C O N T R O L
S T A G E 1 O N L Y

S E L F - R E G U L A T I N G
C O N T R O L M O D E

8.3.3 - Table of “MACHINE STATUS circuit x fault” messages:

This table appears only if any of the following messages must be displayed using the ↑ and ↓ buttons.
The messages are displayed in the following order of priority:

C I R C U I T 2 O F F
L I N K F A U L T

M O T O R F A U L T
S T A G E X C I R C U I T X

C I R C U I T B R E A K X
W A T E R F R O S T F A U L T

C I R C X H 2 0 F R O S T F A U L T
X C U T ( S ) I N 2 4 H

C I R C U I T B R E A K X
R E F R I G . F R O S T F A U L T

CONNECT2 EN-28
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

C I R C X R E F F R O S T E F A U L T
X C U T ( S ) I N 2 4 H

C I R C U I T B R E A K x
H P F A U L T

H P F A U L T C I R C x x x m n
X C U T ( S ) I N 2 4 H

C I R C U I T B R E A K x
M A N U A L H P F A U L T

C I R C U I T B R E A K x
L P F A U L T

C I R C U I T x L P F A U L T
X C U T ( S ) I N 2 4 H

S T A G E x O F F
D I S C H A R G E F A U L T

C I R C U I T B R E A K x
D E F R O S T I N G I M P O S S I B L E

D . T E M P F A U L T x x x m n
X C U T ( S ) I N 2 4 H

C I R C U I T X O F F
If P42 ≠ NO
E X P . V A L V E F A U L

F A U L T O N E X V X
If P42 ≠ NO
X C U T S I N 2 4 H

B O A R D L I N K F A U L T
If P42 = VCM
C I R C U I T X E X V

M O T O R F A U L T
If P42 = VCM
C I R C U I T X E X V

C I R C U I T X O F F
M I N . S U P E R H E A T F A U L T

C I R C U I T X O F F C X
M A X . S U P E R H E A T F A U L T

M I N S U P E R H E A T F A U L T C X X
X C U T ( S ) I N 1 H

M A X S U P E R H E A T F A U L T C X
X C U T ( S ) I N 1 H

E X C H . 1 W A T E R I N L E T
S E N S O R F A U L T J 7 / 2 - 3

E X C H . x W A T E R O U T L E T
S E N S O R F A U L T J X / X - X

EN-29 CONNECT2
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

S U C T I O N T E M P . S E N S O R
F A U L T C I R C . x J x / x x - x x

E X C H . x R E F R . F R O S T
P R O T . S E N S . F A U L T J x / x - x

C O I L x C I R C U I T x
S E N S O R F A U L T J x / x - x

D . T E M P . S E N S O R X F A U L T
J x / x - x

L I Q U I D T E M P . S E N S O R
F A U L T C I R C . x J x / x x - x x

X P x S E N S O R F A U L T
I N L E T J x / x x - x x

S T A G E C I R C U I T x A T
M I N . S T O P x x m n x x s

S H O R T - C Y C L E P R O T E C T I O N
S T A G E x C I R x x x m n x x s

S T A G E x C I R C U I T x
F O R C E D O F F

S T A G E x C I R C U I T x
T U R N I N G O F F

Informational messages:

C X R E F R I G F R O S T L I M .
P O W E R R E D U C .

C I R C . x W A T E R F R O S T L I M .
P O W E R R E D U C .

C I R C U I T x H P L I M I T
P W R R E D U C T I O N x x m n

C I R C . X D . T E M P L I M I T
R E D U C T I O N x x m n

C I R C . x M I N . H P L I M .
P O W E R R E D U C .

H P P R E S S U R E C O N T R O L
S T A G E 1 O N L Y

C I R C U I T X
B E I N G D E F R O S T E D

CONNECT2 EN-30
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

8.3.4 - Electric stages table:

E L E C . S T A G E S S H U T O F F
B Y L O A D S H E D D I N G I N P U T

E L E C . S T A G E S O V E R R I D D E N
B Y O V E R R I D E I N P U T

E L E C T R I C S T A G E F O R C E D
O F F x

8.4 - Measured values menu

To access the MEASURED VALUES menu, use the + or - buttons to position the cursor on 3, then press OK (the list of submenus
can then be accessed).
Position the cursor on CIRCUIT 1 or CIRCUIT 2 then press OK. The values for the circuit selected appear.
Use the + and - buttons to scroll through the tables at a rate of three rows at a time.
Arrows in the reading can be ignored. The square at the bottom right flashes for the reading.
Press the ESC button to return to the main menu.
Exemple :

Visible if P3 = 2 C I R C U I T 1
C I R C U I T 2
For circuit 1:

C L G R E T U R N C T R L ↑
C T R L S T P : - x x . x °
W A T E R I N L E T : - x x . x ° ↓
Visible if P141 = 3 W A T E R o r M A N O U T L E T : x x . x °

H P 1 : x x x . x b C O N T : + x x . x ° ↑
B P 1 : x x x . x b E V A T : + x x . x °
S U C T I O N T . x : + x x . x ° ↓

O V E R H E A T 1 : x x . x ° ↑
D I S . T 1 : x x x ° D I S . T 2 : x x x °
O U T D O O R T . : - x x . x ° ↓

Visible if P3 = 2
W A T E R O U T L E T 1 : - x x . x ° ↑ and if P141 ≠ 3
Visible if P3 = 2 W A T E R O U T L E T 2 : - x x . x °
M A N . W A T E R O U T : - x x . x ° ↓ Visible if P3 = 2
and if P141 ≠ 3

R E F R I G . T . 1 + x x . x ° ↑
Visible if P2 = 1 or
L I Q U I D T E M P . 1 + x x . x ° 2, or 3 + cooling mode
Visible if water-to-water
and operating mode H O T W A T E R T . - x x . x ↓
≠ heating

For circuit 2 :
The menu for circuit 2 is the same as for circuit 1, but with the digit 1 replaced by the digit 2. Thus, discharge temperature REF 1
becomes REF 2 (or 3 depending on the number of compressors per circuit) and REF 2 becomes discharge 4
Message on first row:

H O T S U P P L Y C T R L ↑
H O T R E T U R N C T R L ↓
C L G R E T U R N C T R L ↑
S T O R A G E C T R L ↓
C O M P E N S A T I O N C T R L ↑

EN-31 CONNECT2
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

8.5 - MACHINE PARAMETERS menu

To access the MACHINE PARAMETERS menu, use the + or - buttons to position the cursor on 4 then press OK.
The display shows the list of configuration parameters.
Use the + and - buttons to scroll through the tables at a rate of two rows at a time. To modify a parameter the configuration must
be unlocked (via parameter P99). This turns off the machine.
■ To change a value:
Press OK to enter the parameter. Use the + or - buttons to increment or decrement the value of the parameter then press OK to
confirm the changes. Press OK to save the change or ESC to cancel. When a parameter value is being changed, the square at
the bottom right should flash.
In the case of parameters, the letter P flashes.
The text in messages scrolls in a loop.
Numerical values (with adjustment ranges), however, do not scroll in a loop.
If a parameter is locked (P99 = yes), the symbol is displayed at the top left.
To return to the main menu, press the ESC button repeatedly.

4 - M A C H I N E . P A R A M E T E R

If the user tries to access a locked parameter, the following message appears for 2 seconds before the parameter is redisplayed:

P A R A M E T E R L O C K E D
M O D I F I C A T I O N . I M P O S S I B L E
Once the user sets the “locking” parameter to “NO”, the text is marked Pxx and the button symbol disappears. The following
parameters can then be accessed:
Refrigerant type:
P 0 1 R E F R I G E R A N T :
R 4 0 7 c

P 0 1 R E F R I G E R A N T :
R 1 3 4 a

P 0 1 R E F R I G E R A N T :
R 4 1 0 a

P 0 1 R E F R I G E R A N T :
R 2 2
Unit type:
P 0 2 U N I T :
W A T E R - T O - W A T E R

P 0 2 U N I T :
A I R - T O - W A T E R

P 0 2 U N I T :
R E V E R S I B L E A I R - T O - W A T E R
Number of circuits:
P 0 3 N U M B E R O F C I R C U I T S
1

P 0 3 N U M B E R O F C I R C U I T S
2
Number of stages per circuit:
P x x N O . O F S T A G E S O N
C I R C U I T x 1

P x x N O . O F S T A G E S O N
C I R C U I T x 2

CONNECT2 EN-32
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

Number of evaporators:
P O 6 N O . O F E V A P O R A T O R S
1

P 0 6 N O . O F E V A P O R A T O R S
2
Compressor suppliers:

P 0 7 C O M P R E S S O R
M A N E U R O P

P 0 7 C O M P R E S S O R
C O P E L A N D

P 0 7 C O M P R E S S O R
I N V E R T E R
Heat exchanger suppliers:

P 0 8 E X C H A N G E R
E X L

P 0 8 E X C H A N G E R
S W E P

P 0 8 E X C H A N G E R
S W E P D O U B L E

P 0 8 E X C H A N G E R
A L F A L A V A L
Fan type:

P 1 0 T Y P E V E N T I L A T E U R
H E L I C O I D A L

P 1 0 T Y P E V E N T I L A T E U R
C E N T R I F U G E

P 1 0 T Y P E V E N T I L A T E U R
P R E S S I O N
Coil type:

P 1 1 F A N T Y P E
P R O P E L L E R

P 1 1 F A N T Y P E
C E N T R I F U G A L

P 1 1 F A N T Y P E
P R E S S U R E
Presence of balance solenoid valve:

P 1 2 B A L A N C E
S V Y E S

P 1 2 B A L A N C E
S V N O

EN-33 CONNECT2
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

Tandem type:

P 1 3 B A L A N C E D T A N D E M
C O M P R E S S O R Y E S

P 1 3 B A L A N C E D T A N D E M
C O M P R E S S O R N O

Number of coil sensors per circuit:

P 1 4 N U M B E R O F C O I L S E N S O R
P E R C I R C U I T 1

P 1 4 N U M B E R O F C O I L S E N S O R
P E R C I R C U I T 2

P 1 4 N U M B E R O F C O I L S E N S O R
P E R C I R C U I T 4
All-season operation:

P 2 0 A L L - S E A S O N
O P E R A T I O N N O

P 2 0 A L L - S E A S O N
O P E R A T I O N Y E S
Variable speed control board:

P 2 1 V A R I A B L E S P E E D
W I T H O U T

P 2 1 V A R I A B L E S P E E D
A C O U S T I C O P T I M I S A T I O N

P 2 1 V A R I A B L E S P E E D
E N E R G Y O P T I M I S A T I O N
Electric auxiliary heater board:

P 2 2 E L E C T R I C A U X I L I A R Y
H E A T E R S N O

P 2 2 E L E C T R I C A U X I L I A R Y
H E A T E R S Y E S
Number of pumps:

P 2 5 N U M B E R O F P U M P S
S U P P L I E D 0

P 2 5 N U M B E R O F P U M P S
S U P P L I E D 1

P 2 5 N U M B E R O F P U M P S
S U P P L I E D 2
0-10 V configurable output:

P 2 6 0 - 1 0 V P R O G R A M M A B L E
O U T P U T 2 - W A Y V A L V E

P 2 6 0 - 1 0 V P R O G R A M M A B L E
O U T P U T 3 - W A Y V A L V E

CONNECT2 EN-34
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

Pump controlled by operation of boiler:

P 2 7 P U M P C O N T R O L L E D
B Y B O I L E R N O

P 2 7 P U M P C O N T R O L L E D
B Y B O I L E R Y E S

Master/slave control of two machines:

P 2 8 M A S T E R S L A V E
2 M A C H I N E S N O

P 2 8 M A S T E R S L A V E
2 M A C H I N E S Y E S
Total recovery:

P 2 9 T O T A L
R E C O V E R Y N 0

P 2 9 R E C U P E R A T I O N
R E C O V E R Y Y E S
Frost protection for recovery option:

P 2 9 . 1 H E A T R E C O V . E X C H .
F R O S T P R O T E C T I O N N O

P 2 9 . 1 H E A T R E C O V . E X C H .
F R O S T P R O T E C T I O N Y E S
HP1/HP2 sensor high pressure:

Same with LP P x x H P x S E N S O R
(Low Pressure) H I G H V A L U E x x . x b

Same with LP (Low Pressure) HP1/HP2 sensor low pressure:

Same with LP P x x H P x S E N S O R
(Low Pressure) L O W V A L U E x x . x b
Compressor short-cycle protection:

P 5 0 C O M P R E S S O R S H O R T
C Y C L E P R O T E C T I O N x x m n
Discharge temperature limit:

P 5 1 D I S C H A R G E T E M P .
L I M I T x x x °
Water line frost protection limit:

P 5 2 H 2 O F R O S T P R O T .
L I M I T - x x , x °
Refrigerant frost protection differential
Gives the freon frost limit = water frost limit – this differential
If P08≠SWEP double:

P 5 3 R E F R I G E R A N T F R O S T
P R O T . D I F F . x x K

P 5 3 L P S A T . T E M P . F R O S T
P R O T . D I F F . x x K
HP fault threshold:

P 5 4 H P F A U L T T H R E S H O L D
x x . x b

EN-35 CONNECT2
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

LP fault threshold:

P 5 5 L P F A U L T T H R E S H O L D
x x . x b
LP slope factor:

P 5 8 L P S L O P E
F A C T O R x . x
Water outlet T slope factor:

P 5 9 W A T E R O U T L E T
T . S L O P E F A C T O R x . x
LP fault threshold:

P 6 3 M I N . H P T H R E S H O L D
x x x . x b
Outdoor temperature sensor active :

P 9 8 O U T D O O R T E M P E R A T U R E
S E N S O R A C T I V E N O
Parameter locking:

P 9 9 L O C K
N O

P 9 9 L O C K
Y E S

8.6 - ADJUSTMENT PARAMETERS menu

To access the ADJUSTMENT PARAMETERS menu, use the + or - buttons to position the cursor on 5 then press OK.
The display shows the list of control parameters.
Example:

P x x S T A G E
D I F F E R E N T I A L x x . x K
Pressing on the + and - buttons scrolls through the parameters two lines at a time.
■ To change a value:
Press OK to enter the parameter. Use the + or - buttons to increment or decrement the value of the parameter then press OK to
confirm the changes or ESC to cancel.
To return to the main menu, press the ESC button repeatedly.
5 - A D J U S T M E N T . P A R A M E T E R S

Language :

P 1 0 0 L A N G U A G E
F R A N C A I S

P 1 0 0 L A N G U A G E
E N G L I S H

P 1 0 0 L A N G U A G E
D E U T S C H

P 1 0 0 L A N G U A G E
E S P A Ñ O L

P 1 0 0 L A N G U A G E
N E D E R L A N D S

P 1 0 0 L A N G U A G E
I T A L I A N O

P 1 0 0 L A N G U A G E
P Y C C K

CONNECT2 EN-36
 8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

Control type:

P 1 0 3 C O N T R O L T Y P E
L O C A L

P 1 0 3 C O N T R O L T Y P E
R E M O T E ( B M S , e t s . )
Pump 2 control:

P 1 0 8 P U M P 2 C O N T R O L
F U N C T I O N ( C T R L )
Based either on the control
or on the On/Off status P 1 0 8 P U M P 2 C O N T R O L
of the unit
F U N C T I O N ( O N / O F F )
Pump 2 ‘on’ time delay:

P 1 0 9 P U M P 2 O N
T I M E D E L A Y x x S
Configurable output:

P 1 1 1 P R O G R A M M A B L E O N / O F F
O U T P U T M A X . P O W E R

P 1 1 1 P R O G R A M M A B L E O N / O F F
O U T P U T B O I L E R

P 1 1 1 P R O G R A M M A B L E O N / O F F
O U T P U T C O O L I N G / H E A T I N G
Number of electric stages:

P 1 1 2 N O . O F E L E C T R I C
S T A G E S 0
Configurable input:

P 1 1 3 P R O G R A M M A B L E I N P U T
A U X . H E A T E R D I S A B L E D

P 1 1 3 P R O G R A M M A B L E I N P U T
L O A D S H E D A U X . H E A T E R

P 1 1 3 P R O G R A M M A B L E I N P U T
O V E R R I D E A U X . H E A T E R
Activation fonction gel échangeur :

P 1 1 5 E X C H F R O S T P R O T E C .
E N A B L E D Y E S
Liaison avec régulateur du Drycooler :

P 1 1 6 L I N K W I T H
D R Y C O O L E R Y E S

EN-37 CONNECT2
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

Mode de fonctionnement :

P 1 1 9 O P E R A T I O N
C O O L I N G

P 1 1 9 O P E R A T I O N
H E A T I N G

P 1 1 9 O P E R A T I O N
H T G / C L G V I A C O N S O L E

P 1 1 9 O P E R A T I O N
C L G / H T G V I A O N / O F F

P 1 1 9 O P E R A T I O N
A U T O C L G / H T G / O U T T E M P .
Number of setpoints:

P 1 2 0 N O . O F S E T P O I N T S
1

P 1 2 0 N O . O F S E T P O I N T S
2 V I A C O N S O L E O R B M S

P 1 2 0 N O . O F S E T P O I N T S
2 V I A O N / O F F I N P U T

P 1 2 0 N O . O F S E T P O I N T S
V I A 4 - 2 0 M A I N P U T
Cooling setpoint 1:

P 1 2 1 C O O L I N G S E T P O I N T 1
- x x , x °
Cooling setpoint 2:

P 1 2 2 C O O L I N G S E T P O I N T 2
- x x , x °
Heating setpoint 1:

P 1 2 3 H E A T I N G S E T P O I N T 1
- x x , x °
Heating setpoint 2:

P 1 2 4 H E A T I N G S E T P O I N T 2
- x x , x °
Adjustment of the cooling setpoint based on the outdoor temperature:

P 1 2 7 C O O L I N G S T P B A S E D
O N ( T e x t ) Y E S

P 1 2 7 C O O L I N G S T P B A S E D
O N ( T e x t ) N O
Start of drift in cooling mode:

P 1 2 8 D R I F T S T A R T
C O O L I N G x x °
End of drift in cooling mode:

P 1 2 9 D R I F T E N D
C O O L I N G x x °

CONNECT2 EN-38
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

Maximum setpoint at end of drift in cooling mode:

P 1 3 0 M A X S T P A T D R I F T
E N D C O O L I N G x x °
Adjustment of the heating setpoint based on outdoor the temperature:

P 1 3 1 H E A T I N G S T P B A S E D
O N ( T e x t ) O U I

P 1 3 1 H E A T I N G S T P B A S E D
O N ( T e x t ) N O N
Start of drift in heating mode:

P 1 3 2 D R I F T S T A R T
H E A T I N G x x °
End of drift in heating mode:

P 1 3 3 D R I F T E N D
H E A T I N G x x °
End of drift setpoint in heating mode:

P 1 3 4 M A X S T P A T D R I F T
E N D H E A T I N G x x °
Control mode :

P 1 4 1 R E G U L A T I O N T Y P E
O N I N L E T
Water supply control with
compensation by water P 1 4 1 R E G U L A T I O N T Y P E
return
O N O U T L E T

P 1 4 1 R E G U L A T I O N T Y P E
O N O U T L E T + C O M P E N S A T I O N
Water loop winter protection:

P 1 4 2 W A T E R L O O P W I N T E R
P R O T E C T I O N Y E S

P 1 4 2 W A T E R L O O P W I N T E R
P R O T E C T I O N N O
■ Return and supply control:
Stage differential:

P 1 4 3 S T A G E
D I F F E R E N T I A L x . x K
Interstage differential:

P 1 4 4 I N T E R S T A G E
D I F F E R E N T I A L x . x K
Proportional coefficient:

P 1 4 5 P . C O E F F I C I E N T
x . x
Integral coefficient:

P 1 4 6 I . C O E F F I C I E N T
x . x
Derivative coefficient:

P 1 4 7 D . C O E F F I C I E N T
x . x

EN-39 CONNECT2
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

Time coefficient:

P 1 4 8 T . C O E F F I C I E N T
x x x s
Control with compensation:

P 1 5 0 C O M P E N S A T I O N
C O E F F I C I E N T x . x

P 1 5 1 C O M P E N S A T I O N
T I M E x x x s
Storage control:

P 1 5 4 S T O R A G E
C O N T R O L Y E S

P 1 5 4 S T O R A G E
C O N T R O L N O

P 1 5 5 S T O R A G E C T R L
D I F F E R E N T I A L x . x K
■ Defrosting:
Temperature at start of defrosting:

P 1 5 7 T E M P E R A T U R E S T A R T
D E F R O S T I N G - x x , x °
Temperature at end of defrosting:

P 1 5 8 T E M P E R A T U R E E N D
D E F R O S T I N G - x x , x °
Frosting type:

P 1 5 9 F R O S T I N G T Y P E
F I X E D T I M E

P 1 5 9 F R O S T I N G T Y P E
O P T I M I S E D
Frosting cycle time:

P 1 6 0 F R O S T I N G T I M E
F I X E D x x m n
Frosting factor:

P 1 6 1 F R O S T I N G
F A C T O R 0 . 3
Correction with respect to the reference outdoor temperature during optimised frosting:

P 1 6 2 C O R R E C T I O N T O R E F
O U T D O O R T E M P 0 . 2
Time delay for turning off the compressors during defrosting:

P 1 6 3 C O M P O F F T I M E D E L A Y
D U R I N G D E F R O S T x x x S
Differential for turning on the fans during defrosting:

P 1 6 4 H P O N D I F F
D E F R O S T I N G x x . x b
Differential for shutting off the fans during defrosting:

P 1 6 5 H P O F F D I F F
D E F R O S T I N G x x . x b

CONNECT2 EN-40
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

Charge limit function:

P 1 7 1 M A X W A T E R T E M P .
S T A G E 2 L O A D S H E D - x x , x °
Load shedding via ON/OFF input:

P 1 7 5 T Y P E O F L O A D S H E D .
V I A O N / O F F I N P U T A U T O

P 1 7 5 T Y P E O F L O A D S H E D
V I A O N / O F F I N P U T . S E L E C T .
■ Fan control:
Number of fan stages:

P 1 8 0 N O . O F H P C T R L
S T A G E S / C I R C U I T X
HP control setpoint:

P 1 8 1 H P C O N T R O L
S E T P O I N T x x , x b
Outdoor air temperature, forced fan operation:

P 1 8 2 O U T . A I R T E M P .
F O R C E D F A N S x x , x °
Fan stage differential:

P 1 8 3 H P C T R L S T A G E
D I F F E R E N T I A L x . x b b
Fan interstage differential:

P 1 8 4 H P C T R L I N T E R S T A G E
D I F F E R E N T I A L x . x b b
■ High Pressure control:
Low Noise operation:

P 1 9 1 L O W N O I S E
O P E R A T I O N Y E S

P 1 9 1 L O W N O I S E
O P E R A T I O N N O
Maximum fan speed threshold:

P 1 9 2 S E U I L M A X I V T E S S E
T H R E S H O L D x x . x V
Shifting of HP setpoint during recovery:

P 1 9 3 H P S T P S H I F T
R E C O V E R Y x x . x b
Differential used to reduce power before cutting off the HP:

P 1 9 5 H P D I F F . F O R
P O W E R R E D U C . x . x b
Differential used to return to normal condensing pressure control:

P 1 9 6 H P D I F F . H P R E T U R N
C O N D P R E S S C T R L x . x b
Value at 0 V:

P 1 9 7 O U T P U T L I N K T O P 2 6
V A L U E A T 0 V x x . x b
Value at 10 V:

P 1 9 8 O U T P U T L I N K T O P 2 6
V A L U E A T 1 0 V x x . x b

EN-41 CONNECT2
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

Outdoor temperature at which the heating elements are turned on:

P 2 2 0 O U T . T E M P E R A T U R E
W I N T E R P R O T E C . - x x , x °
Differential used to shut off these heating elements:

P 2 2 2 O U T . T E M P . D I F F .
W I N T E R P R O T E C . - x x , x °
Minimum air temperature for operation in heating mode:

P 2 2 5 M I N . A I R T E M P . I N
H E A T I N G M O D E - x x °
Maximum air temperature for operation in cooling mode:

P 2 2 5 . 1 M A X . A I R T E M P . I N
C O O L I N G M O D E - x x °
Maximum air temperature for operation in heating mode:

P 2 2 5 . 2 M A X . A I R T E M P .
I N H E A T I N G M O D E - x x °
Minimum air temperature for operation in cooling mode:

P 2 2 5 . 3 M I N . A I R T E M P .
I N C O O L I N G M O D E - x x °
Air temperature at which the electric auxiliary heaters or boiler may be turned on:

P 2 2 6 O U T . T E M P .
A U X I L . A U T H . O N - x x °
Authorisation for compressor stages to turn on:

P 2 3 0 S T A G E 1 C I R C U I T 1
O N Y E S

P 2 3 1 S T A G E 2 C I R C U I T 1
O N Y E S

Same when ‘No’ P 2 3 2 S T A G E 1 C I R C U I T 2

O N Y E S

P 2 3 3 S T A G E 2 C I R C U I T 2
O N Y E S
Authorisation for electric stages to turn on:

P 2 3 5 E L E C T R I C S T A G E 1
O N Y E S

P 2 3 6 E L E C T R I C S T A G E 2
O N Y E S

Same when ‘No’ P 2 3 7 E L E C T R I C S T A G E 3

O N Y E S

P 2 3 8 E L E C T R I C S T A G E 4
O N Y E S
Electronic expansion valve:

P 6 0 1 C I R C U I T 1
V A L V E T Y P E E X 4

P 6 0 2 C I R C U I T 1
S U P E R H E A T S T P 6 ° C

CONNECT2 EN-42
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

P 6 0 3 C I R C U I T 1
M O P P O I N T Y E S

P 6 0 4 C I R C U I T 1
M O P V A L U E 1 5 ° C

P 6 0 5 % O P N G C 1 E X V
S T A R T A I R C O N X X X %

P 6 0 6 % O P N G C 1 E X V
S T A R T H E A T P U M P X X X %

P 6 0 7 O P E N I N G T I M E
S T A R T - U P C 1 X X S

P 6 0 8 C I R C U I T 1
S L O W M O D E N O N

P 6 1 1 C I R C U I T 2
V A L V E T Y P E E X 4

P 6 1 2 C I R C U I T 2
S U P E R H E A T S T P 6 ° C

P 6 1 3 C I R C U I T 2
M O P P O I N T Y E S

P 6 1 4 C I R C U I T 2
M O P V A L U E 1 5 ° C

P 6 1 5 % O P N G C 2 E X V
S T A R T A I R C O N X X X %

P 6 1 6 % O P N G C 2 E X V
S T A R T H E A T P U M P X X X %

P 6 1 7 O P E N I N G T I M E
S T A R T - U P C 2 X X S

P 6 1 8 C I R C U I T 2
S L O W M O D E N O
■ Communication:
Control type:

P 1 0 3 C O N T R O L T Y P E
L O C A L

P 1 0 3 C O N T R O L T Y P E
R E M O T E ( B M S , e t c . )
Communication protocol:

P 7 0 0 C O M M U N I C A T I O N
P R O T O C O L B U S M O D E
Transmission speed:

P 7 0 1 T R A N S M I S S I O N
S P E E D 4 8 0 0 b a u d s
Parity:

P 7 0 2 P A R I T Y
W I T H O U T

EN-43 CONNECT2
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

Number of stop bits:

P 7 0 3 N U M B E R O F S T O P
B I T S 1
Format of real numbers:

P 7 0 4 S W A P P E D R E A L N U M B E R
F O R M A T Y E S
Bus number:

P 7 0 5 B U S N U M B E R
0 0 0
■ Master/slave configuration:

P 8 0 0 M A S T E R M A C H I N E
O N L O O P Y E S

P 8 0 1 B A C K U P
M A C H I N E Y E S

P 8 0 2 S W I T C H B A C K U P
M A C H I N E Y E S

P 8 0 3 B A C K U P M A C H I N E
N A M E S L A V E

P 8 0 4 L O O P C O N T R O L
T Y P E P A R A L L E L

P 8 0 5 M A C H I N E
D I F F E R E N T I A L x x . x °

P 8 0 6 D I F F E R E N T I A L
B T W N M A C H I N E S x x . x °

P 8 0 7 M A X . D I F F .
A D D I T I O N A L M A C H . x x °

P 8 0 8 T I M E D E L A Y
B T W N M A C H I N E S x x m n x x

P 8 0 9 A U T H O R I S E
M A C H I N E 1 O N Y E S

P 8 1 0 A U T H O R I S E
M A C H I N E 2 O N Y E S

8.7 - OPERATION PARAMETERS menu

To access the OPERATION PARAMETERS menu, use the + or - buttons to position the cursor on 6 then press OK.
The display shows the list of operation parameters.
Exemple :

P x x x E X C H . 1 I N L E T W A T E R
T E M P . 1 2 . 5 °
Pressing on the + and - buttons scrolls through the parameters two lines at a time.
The values of these parameters cannot be changed.
To return to the main menu, press the ESC button repeatedly.

6 - R E A D I N G . P A R A M E T E R S

CONNECT2 EN-44
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

LED test: used to turn on the console LEDs corresponding to the machine configuration:

P 2 5 0 L E D T E S T

Control setpoint:

P 2 5 1 C O N T R O L
S E T P O I N T x x . x °
Outdoor air temperature:

P 2 5 2 O U T D O O R A I R
T E M P E R A T U R E x x . x °
Water inlet temperature in heat exchanger on circuit 1:

P 2 5 5 E X C H . 1 W A T E R
I N L E T T E M P . x x . x °
Water outlet temperature in heat exchanger on circuit 1:

P 2 5 6 E X C H . 1 W A T E R
O U T L E T T E M P . x x . x °
Hot water temperature at condenser inlet (water-to-water unit):

P 2 5 7 W A T E R T E M P E R A T U R E
C O N D E N S E R I N L E T x x . x °
Hot water temperature at condenser outlet (water-to-water unit):

P 2 5 8 W A T E R T E M P E R A T U R E
C O N D E N S E R O U T L E T x x . x °
Circuit 1 coil temperature:

P 2 5 9 C I R C . 1 C O I L T E M P .
A : - x x . x ° B : - x x . x °
C : - x x . x ° D : - x x . x °
Circuit 1 coil temperature where P14 = 1:

P 2 5 9 C I R C . 1 C O I L T E M P .
- x x . x °
Refrigerant temperature on circuit 1 heat exchanger:

P 2 6 0 E X C H . 1
R E F R . T E M P . - x x . x °
Water temperature measured on manifold (case of two heat exchangers):

P 2 6 1 M A N I F O L D W A T E R
O U T L E T T E M P . - x x . x °
Water outlet temperature on circuit 2 heat exchanger:

P 2 6 2 E X C H . 2 W A T E R
O U T L E T T E M P . - x x . x °
Circuit 2 coil temperature:

P 2 6 3 C I R C . 2 C O I L T E M P .
A : - x x . x ° B : - x x . x °
C : - x x . x ° D : - x x . x °
Refrigerant temperature on circuit 2 heat exchanger:

P 2 6 4 E X C H . 2
R E F R . T E M P . - x x . x °
Ambient temperature of heat exchanger:

P 2 6 5 E X C H A N G E R
A M B I E N T T E M P . - x x . x °

EN-45 CONNECT2
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

Calculated frosting time, circuit 1:

P 2 6 6 C A L C U L A T E D F R O S T .
T I M E C I R C U I T 1 x x m n
Calculated frosting time, circuit 2:

P 2 6 7 C A L C U L A T E D F R O S T .
T I M E C I R C U I T 2 x x m n
Value of referenced Delta-T for optimised defrosting on circuit 1:

P 2 6 8 O P T I D E F R O S T I N G C 1
D T R E F = x x . x ° D T D = x x . x °
Value of referenced Delta-T for optimised defrosting on circuit 2:

P 2 6 9 O P T I D E F R O S T I N G C 2
D T R E F = x x . x ° D T D = x x . x °
Control time delay:

P 2 7 0 C O N T R O L L E R
T I M E D E L A Y x x x s
Heating mode runtime (in hours):

P 2 8 5 H E A T I N G M O D E
R U N T I M E x x x x x x H
Cooling mode runtime (in hours):

P 2 8 6 C O O L I N G M O D E
R U N T I M E x x x x x x H
Pump 1 runtime (in hours):

P 2 8 7 P U M P 1
R U N T I M E x x x x x x H
Pump 2 runtime (in hours):

P 2 8 8 P U M P 2
R U N T I M E x x x x x x H
Number of times P99 set to ‘No’:

P 2 8 9 N O . T I M E S P 9 9
S E T T O ‘ N O ’ x x x x x x
Number of water flow cut-offs in 1 hour:

P 2 9 0 N O . W A T E R F L O W
C U T S I N 1 H x
■ Circuit 1 information:
Circuit 1 High Pressure value:

P 3 0 0 H P 1 P R E S S U R E
x x . x b
Value of calculated High Pressure control setpoint:

P 3 0 0 . 1 H P 1 C O N T R O L
S E T P O I N T x x . x b
Circuit 1 condensing temperature value resulting from the previous pressure level and the refrigerant selected:

P 3 0 1 C I R C U I T 1
C O N D . T E M P . x x . x °
Stage 1, circuit 1 discharge temperature value:

P 3 0 2 . 1 D I S C H A R G E
T E M P E R A T U R E 1 x x x °
Stage 2, circuit 1 discharge temperature value:

P 3 0 2 . 2 D I S C H A R G E
T E M P E R A T U R E 2 x x x °

CONNECT2 EN-46
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

Desuperheat temperature on discharge 1 (= discharge temperature – condensation dew point temperature) :

P 3 0 3 . 1 D I S C H A R G E 1
D E S U P E R H E A T 1 x x . x °
Desuperheat temperature on discharge 2 (= discharge temperature – condensation dew point temperature) :

P 3 0 3 . 2 D I S C H A R G E 2
D E S U P E R H E A T 2 x x . x °
Circuit 1 Low Pressure value:

P 3 0 4 L P 1 P R E S S U R E
x x . x b
Circuit 1 evaporating temperature value resulting from the previous pressure value and the refrigerant selected :

P 3 0 5 C I R C U I T 1
E V A P . T E M P . x x x . x °
Circuit 1 suction temperature value :

P 3 0 6 C I R C U I T 1
S U C T I O N T E M P . x x x . x °
Circuit 1 superheat temperature :

P 3 0 7 C I R C U I T 1
S U P E R H E A T x x x . x °
Number of cut-offs caused by a High Pressure fault on circuit 1 in 24 hours :

P 3 0 8 N O . H P 1 C U T S
I N 2 4 H O U R S x
Number of cut-offs caused by a Low Pressure fault on circuit 1 in 24 hours :

P 3 0 9 N O . L P 1 C U T S
I N 2 4 H O U R S S x
Number of times stage 1 on circuit 1 turned on :

P 3 1 0 N O . S T A R T S
S T A G E 1 C I R C U I T 1 x x x x x
Runtime of stage 1 on circuit 1 :

P 3 1 1 S T A G E 1 C I R C U I T 1
R U N T I M E x x x x x H
Short-cycle protection on stage 1 of circuit 1 :

P 3 1 2 S T A G E 1 C I R C U I T 1
S C P x x m n x x S
Number of times stage 2 on circuit 1 turned on :

P 3 1 3 N O . S T A R T S
S T A G E 2 C I R C U I T 1 x x x x x
Runtime of stage 2 on circuit 1 :

P 3 1 4 S T A G E 2 C I R C U I T 1
R U N T I M E x x x x x H
Short-cycle protection on stage 2 of circuit 1 :

P 3 1 5 S T A G E 2 , C I R C U I T 1
S C P x x m n x x S
Number of cut-offs caused by frost protection on circuit 1 water line in 24 hours :

P 3 2 2 N O . H 2 O F R O S T P R O T
C U T S C I R C 1 X
Number of cut-offs caused by frost protection on circuit 1 refrigerant line in 24 hours :

P 3 2 3 N O F R O S T P R O T C U T S
C 1 R E F R I G X

EN-47 CONNECT2
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

Number of cut-offs caused by discharge temperature on stage 1 in 24 hours :

P 3 2 4 . 1 N O . D I S C H A R G E 1
C U T S I N 2 4 H X
Number of cut-offs caused by discharge temperature on stage 2 in 24 hours :

P 3 2 4 . 2 N O . D I S C H A R G E 2
C U T S I N 2 4 H X
Percentage of opening for the electronic expansion valve on circuit 1 :

P 3 2 5 C 1 E X V
O P E N I N G X X X %
Circuit 1 liquid temperature :

P 3 2 6 C I R C U I T 1
L I Q U I D T E M P . x x . x °
Circuit 1 subcooling value :

P 3 2 7 C I R C U I T 1
S U B C O O L I N G x x . x °
Number of cut-offs caused by circuit 1 expansion valve fault :

P 3 2 8 N O . C U T O F F S C A U S E
B Y C 1 E X V I N 2 4 H x
■ Circuit 2
Circuit 2 High Pressure value :

P 3 3 0 H P 2 P R E S S U R E
x x . x b
Value of calculated HP control setpoint :

P 3 3 1 H P 2 C O N T R O L
S E T P O I N T x x . x °
Circuit 2 condensing temperature value resulting from the previous pressure value and the refrigerant selected :

P 3 3 1 C I R C U I T 2
C O N D . T E M P . x x . x °
Stage 1, circuit 2 discharge temperature value :

P 3 3 2 . 1 D I S C H A R G E
R E F O U L E M E N T 2 x x x °

P 3 3 2 . 1 D I S C H A R G E
T E M P E R A T U R E 3 x x x °
Stage 2, circuit 2 discharge temperature value :

P 3 3 2 . 2 D I S C H A R G E
T E M P E R A T U R E 4 x x x °
Desuperheat temperature on circuit 2 stage 1 discharge
(= discharge temperature – condensation dew point temperature) :

P 3 3 3 . 1 D I S C H A R G E 2
D E S U P E R H E A T x x . x °

P 3 3 3 . 1 D I S C H A R G E 3
D E S U P E R H E A T x x . x °
Desuperheat temperature on circuit 2 stage 2 discharge
(= discharge temperature – condensation dew point temperature) :

P 3 3 3 . 2 D I S C H A R G E 4
D E S U P E R H E A T x x . x °
Circuit 2 Low Pressure value :

P 3 3 4 L P 2 P R E S S U R E
x x . x b

CONNECT2 EN-48
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

Circuit 2 evaporating temperature value resulting from the previous pressure value and the refrigerant selected :

P 3 3 5 C I R C U I T 2
E V A P . T E M P . x x x . x °
Circuit 2 suction temperature value :

P 3 3 6 C I R C U I T 2
S U C T I O N T E M P . x x x . x °
Circuit 2 superheat temperature :

P 3 3 7 C I R C U I T 2
S U P E R H E A T x x x . x °
Number of cut-offs caused by a High Pressure fault on circuit 2 in 24 hours :

P 3 3 8 N O . H P 2 C U T S
I N 2 4 H O U R S x
Number of cut-offs caused by a Low Pressure fault on circuit 2 in 24 hours :

P 3 3 9 N O . L P 2 C U T S
I N 2 4 H O U R S x
Number of times stage 1 on circuit 2 turned on :

P 3 4 0 N O . S T A R T S
S T A G E 1 C I R C U I T 2 x x x x x
Runtime of stage 1 on circuit 2 :

P 3 4 1 S T A G E 1 C I R C U I T 2
R U N T I M E x x x x x H
Short-cycle protection on stage 1 of circuit 2 :

P 3 4 2 S T A G E 1 , C I R C U I T 2
S C P x x m n x x S
Number of times stage 2 on circuit 2 turned on :

P 3 4 3 N O . S T A R T S
S T A G E 2 C I R C U I T 2 x x x x x
Runtime of stage 2 on circuit 2 :

P 3 4 4 S T A G E 2 C I R C U I T 2
R U N T I M E x x x x x H
Short-cycle protection on stage 2 of circuit 2 :

P 3 4 5 S T A G E 2 , C I R C U I T 2
S C P x x m n x x S
Number of cut-offs caused by frost protection on circuit 2 water line in 24 hours :

P 3 5 2 N O . H 2 O F R O S T P R O T
C U T S C I R C 2 x
Number of cut-offs caused by frost protection on circuit 2 refrigerant line in 24 hours :

P 3 5 3 N O F R O S T P R O T C U T S
C 2 R E F R I G x
Number of cut-offs caused by discharge temperature on stage 1 of circuit 2 in 24 hours :

P 3 5 4 . 1 N O . D I S C H A R G E 2
C U T S I N 2 4 H x

P 3 5 4 . 1 N O . D I S C H A R G E 3
C U T S I N 2 4 H X
Number of cut-offs caused by discharge temperature on stage 2 of circuit 2 in 24 hours :

P 3 5 4 . 2 N O . D I S C H A R G E 4
C U T S I N 2 4 H X

EN-49 CONNECT2
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

Percentage of opening for the electronic expansion valve on circuit 2 :

P 3 5 5 C 2 E X V
O P E N I N G X X X %
Circuit 2 liquid temperature :

P 3 5 6 C I R C U I T 2
L I Q U I D T E M P . x x . x °
Circuit 2 subcooling value :

P 3 5 7 C I R C U I T 2
S U B C O O L I N G x x . x °
Number of cut-offs caused by circuit 2 expansion valve fault :

P 3 5 8 N O . C U T O F F S C A U S E D
B Y C 2 E X V I N 2 4 H X
■ Inputs:
State of unit automatic operation control input :

P 4 0 0 A U T O . O P E R A T I O N
C T R L I N P U T O P E N
State of setpoint selection input (1 or 2) :

P 4 0 2 S E T P O I N T S E L E C T I O N
I N P U T 1
State of water flow fault input:

P 4 0 3 W A T E R F L O W Same when
F A U L T I N P U T O P E N ‘CLOSED’

State of fan fault input:

P 4 0 4 F A N F A U L T
I N P U T O P E N
State of operating mode selection input:

P 4 0 5 H E A T I N G / C O O L I N G
M O D E I N P U T O P E N
State of phase controller fault input :

P 4 0 6 P H A S E C O N T R O L L E R
F A U L T I N P U T O P E N
State of recovery operating mode selection input :

P 4 0 7 R E C O V E R Y O P E R A T I O N
I N P U T O P E N
State of fault input 1 on Additional board 1 for units equipped with auxiliary electric heaters P22 = Yes :

P 4 0 8 F A U L T I N P U T 1
E L E C T R I C A D D 1 O P E N
State of fault input 2 on Additional board 1 for units equipped with auxiliary electric heaters P22 = Yes :

P 4 0 9 F A U L T I N P U T 2
E L E C T R I C A D D 1 O P E N
State of configurable input on additional board 1 for units equipped with auxiliary electric heaters P22 = Yes and P113 = load
shedding or forced :

P 4 1 0 C O N F I G U R A B L E I N P U T
E L E C T R I C A D D 1 O P E N
State of stage 1 override input :

P 4 1 4 S T A G E 1 O V E R R I D E
I N P U T O P E N

CONNECT2 EN-50
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

State of stage 2 override input :

P 4 1 5 S T A G E 2 O V E R R I D E
I N P U T O P E N
State of stage 3 override input :

P 4 1 6 S T A G E 3 O V E R R I D E
I N P U T O P E N
State of stage 4 override input :

P 4 1 7 S T A G E 4 O V E R R I D E
I N P U T O P E N
State of manual High Pressure switch input on circuit 1 :

P 4 1 8 M A N U A L H P 1
F A U L T I N P U T O P E N
State of stage 1, circuit 1 fault input :

P 4 1 9 S T A G E 1 C I R C U I T 1
F A U L T I N P U T O P E N
State of stage 2, circuit 1 fault input :

P 4 2 0 S T A G E 2 C I R C U I T 1
F A U L T I N P U T O P E N
State of manual High Pressure switch input on circuit 2 :

P 4 2 2 M A N U A L H P 2
F A U L T I N P U T O P E N
State of stage 1, circuit 2 fault input :

P 4 2 3 S T A G E 1 C I R C U I T 2
F A U L T I N P U T O P E N
State of stage 2, circuit 2 fault input :

P 4 2 4 S T A G E 2 C I R C U I T 2
F A U L T I N P U T O P E N
State of fault input for electronic expansion valve on circuit 1 :

P 4 2 5 C I R C 1 E X V
F A U L T I N P U T O P E N
State of fault input for electronic expansion valve on circuit 2 :

P 4 2 6 C I R C 2 E X V
F A U L T I N P U T O P E N
■ Outputs :
Pump 1 contact :

P 4 3 0 P U M P 1 O U T P U T
O N
Pump 2 contact :

P 4 3 1 P U M P 2 O U T P U T
O N
Circuit 1 Y/C contact :

P 4 3 2 C I R C U I T 1
Y / C O U T P U T O N
Circuit 2 Y/C contact :

P 4 3 3 C I R C U I T 2
Y / C O U T P U T O N
Heat trace cable contact :

P 4 3 5 H E A T T R A C E
O N

EN-51 CONNECT2
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

Heater contact :

P 4 3 6 H E A T E R
O U T P U T O N
Contact for frost protection heat trace cable (recovery option) :

P 4 3 7 R E C O V E R Y F R O S T
P R O T . O U T P U T O N
Configurable output contact :

P 4 3 8 M A X I M U M
P O W E R O U T P U T O N

P 4 3 9 B O I L E R O U T P U T
O F F

P 4 4 0 C L G / H T G R E P O R T
O U T P U T O F F
Control contact for fan stages if P180 = 1 :

P 4 4 1 F A N O F F
O N
H S HS (High Speed)
=high temperature
L S LS = Low Speed

Control contact for fan stages P180 = 2 (2 stages) and P3 = 1 (1 circuit) :

P 4 4 1 H P C O N T R O L
S T A G E 1 O U T P U T O N

P 4 4 2 H P C O N T R O L
S T A G E 2 O U T P U T O N
Control contact for fan stages P180 = 2 (2 stages) and P3 = 2 (2 circuits) :

P 4 4 1 H P C O N T R O L
S T A G E 1 C 1 O U T P U T O N

P 4 4 2 H P C O N T R O L
S T A G E 2 C 1 O U T P U T O N

P 4 4 3 H P C O N T R O L
S T A G E 1 C 2 O U T P U T O N

P 4 4 4 H P C O N T R O L
S T A G E 2 C 2 O U T P U T O N
Control contact for fan stages P180 = 3 (3 stages) and P3 = 2 (2 circuits) and P11 = split
P441, P442, P443 and P444 same as P180 = 2 (2 stages) and P3 = 2 (2 circuits) :

P 4 4 5 H P C O N T R O L
S T A G E 3 C 1 O U T P U T O N

P 4 4 6 H P C O N T R O L
S T A G E 3 C 2 O U T P U T O N
Control contact for fan stages P180 = 3 (3 stages) and P3 = 2 (2 circuits) and P11 = mixed
P441, P442, P443 and P444 same as P180 = 2 (2 stages) and P3 = 2 (2 circuits) :

P 4 4 5 H P C O N T R O L
C O M S T A G E 1 O U T P U T O N

P 4 4 6 H P C O N T R O L
C O M S T A G E 3 O U T P U T O N

CONNECT2 EN-52
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

Speed control information (intertwined coil) :

P 4 4 7 H P S T A G E 1
D R I V I N G V O L T A G E X X . X V
Speed control information (split or mixed coil), stage 1, circuit 1 :

P 4 4 8 H P S T A G E 1 C 1
D R I V I N G V O L T A G E X X . X V
Speed control information (split or mixed coil), stage 1, circuit 2 :

P 4 4 9 H P S T A G E 1 C 2
D R I V I N G V O L T A G E X X . X V
Speed control information (mixed coil), common stage 1 :

P 4 5 0 H P C O M S T A G E 1
D R I V I N G V O L T A G E X X . X V
Circuit 1 balance valve output contact :

P 4 5 1 C 1 B A L A N C E V A L V E
O U T P U T O N
Circuit 2 balance valve output contact :

P 4 5 2 C 2 B A L A N C E V A L V E
O U T P U T O N
Electric stage output :

P 5 3 x E L E C T R I C S T A G E x
O U T P U T O N
Air blade information :

P 5 3 5 A I R B L A D E
Stages 1 to 4
O P E N I N G % x x x %
Version :

P 5 5 5 C P U V E R S I O N N O .
x x - x x
P 5 5 6 C O N S O L E V E R S I O N
N O . x x - x x

P 5 5 7 C I R C U I T 2 B O A R D
V E R S I O N N O . x x - x x

P 5 5 8 R E V E R S A L B O A R D
V E R S I O N N O . x x - x x

P 5 5 9 A U X . B O A R D
V E R S I O N N O . x x - x x
Version number of circuit 1 electronic expansion valve :

P 5 6 0 C I R 1 E X V V E R S I O N
N O . X X . Y Y V C M X X . Y Y
Version number of circuit 2 electronic expansion valve :

P 5 6 1 C I R 2 E X V V E R S I O N
N O . X X . Y Y V C M X X . Y Y
“SO” order number :

P 5 7 0 S O O R D E R
N U M B E R X X X X X X X X
MO number :

P 5 7 1 M O N U M B E R
X X X X X X X X

EN-53 CONNECT2
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

Machine identification name :

P 5 7 2 M A C H I N E L O C A T I O N
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Machine identification number :

P 5 7 3 M A C H I N E N U M B E R
X X X X X X X X

8.8 - FAULT MEMORY menu

This menu records the last 20 faults on the machine and the associated values measured at the time the faults occurred.
To enter the FAULT MEMORY menu, use the + or - buttons to position the cursor on 7 then press OK.
The list of faults appears on the display. Press the + or - buttons to scroll through the faults.
■ Accessing the fault memory :
To access measured values when a fault occurred, press OK.
Measured values cannot be accessed in the event of a mains power failure.
Press the + or - buttons to scroll through the faults line by line. To go back to the main menu, press the button ESC until the menu
appears.
Below is the list of messages that appear in the fault memory regardless of the fault type (main circuit fault, main unit fault, temporary
fault) :

x - M A I N
S P O W E R F A I L U R E
x - P H A S
E C O N T R O L L E R
x - W A T E
R F L O W R A T E
x - W A T E
R F R O S T P R O T . x
x - R E F R
. F R O S T P R O T . X
x - C P D
E L T A P
x - C O M P D R I V E R
x - C I R C
U I T x H P
x - M A N U
A L H P x
x - C I R C
U I T x L P
x - M O T O
R S T A G E x C I R x
x - M I N S U P E R H E A T C X
x - M A X S U P E R H E A T C X
x - R E F . T . x
x - M I N . T E M P . / A I R
x - M A X . T E M P . / A I R
x - F A N
x - E X C H . H 2 O I N . S E N S O R
x - E X C H . x H 2 O O U T . S E N S .
x - O U T . T E M P . S E N S O R
x - E X C H . x F R O S P R O T . S E N S O On refrigerant
x - C O N D E N S E R I N S E N S O R
x - C O N D E N S E R O U T S E N S O R
x - C I R x C O I L A S E N S O R
x - D I S C H . S E N S O R x
x - M A N I F . H 2 O S E N S O R
x - E X C H . A M B . S E N S O R
x - S U C T I O N S E N S O R
x - L P S E N S O R x
x - H P S E N S O R x
x - P U M P X
x - P U M P S 1 A N D 2
x - S E L F - A D J C T R L
x - C I R C U I T x D E F R O S T
x - C X E X P . V A L V E
x - E X P . V A L V E X L I N K
x - E X C H . F R O S T P R O T . x
F A U L T M E M O R Y E M P T Y

CONNECT2 EN-54
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

Reading for saving faults to memory :

■ Reading if a circuit fault occurs: information on circuit that cut off

H P X : x x x . x b T C O N D : + x x . x ° ↑
L P x : x x x . x b T E V A P : + x x . x °
S U C T I O N T . x : + x x . x ° °
S U P E R H E A T x : x x . x ° ° ↓

D I S . T 1 : x x x ° D I S . T 2 : x x x ° ↑
W A T E R I N L E T : - x x . x °
W A T E R O U T L E T : - x x . x °
O U T D O O R T . : - x x . x ° ↓

R E F R I G . T . x + x x . x ° ↑
H O T W A T E R T . - x x . x
■ If a unit fault occurs :

O U T D O O R T . : - x x . x ° ↑
C T R L S T P : - x x . x °
W A T E R I N L E T : - x x . x ° Manifold water outlets
(if two circuits)
M A N . W A T E R O U T : x x . x ° ↓ or water outlet 1
(if one circuit)

H O T W A T E R T . - x x . x ° ↑

8.9 - TEST MODE menu

TEST MODE is used to shorten time delays and eliminate limits (but keep the protections on).
The other menus (measured values, parameters, fault memory, etc.) can be accessed while in test mode.
When test mode is on for a circuit, the Voltage LED flashes quickly (the same LED on the remote control console flashes).
► To turn on test mode :
- Via menu 8.

T E S T M O D E
Y E S
T E S T M O D E
N O
Select YES or NO with the + and - buttons. Press OK to confirm your choice.
► To turn off test mode :
- Select NO in the submenu of menu 8 or wait 1 hour for test mode to turn off (NO) automatically.
Test mode remains on for 1 hour.

8.10 - HP test per circuit (from version V27)

The HP test is used to check the correct operation and threshold for activating the high pressure switch by applying very special
operating conditions to the unit.
It is specifically used at the end of the machine's execution test to check compliance with the legal requirements relating to high-
pressure safety.
It may also be used by the operator service when the unit is located at a customer's site.
This test consists of running the unit with high pressure until the high pressure switch opens (just before the a high-pressure safety
valve releases refrigerant into the atmosphere). To successfully fulfil this condition, several safety functions must be overridden in
this specific scenario.
- To prevent the discharge of the compressor, the HP fault threshold in the software (P54 in the configuration parameters) is
increased to bring it above the pressure switch threshold (to reach this pressure switch threshold, the compressor must run
outside of its comfort zone).
- The HP test systematically switches the unit to cooling mode.
- During the HP test, the time delay between stage values… will be the same as those used for test mode.

H P T E S T - C I R C U I T X

- Menu accessible from the "TEST MODE" menu

- Access level 3.

EN-55 CONNECT2
8 - CONTENTS OF THE MENUS

a) Start-up procedure
- The test function will only be authorised to run if the unit is shut down.
- The circuit must be available (no forced shut-down of the 2 compressors; no fault)
- The normal HP test can only be performed from the local control console (not from the remote control console or from a CMS).
- The HP test is performed with just 1 compressor.
- The software shut-down threshold is 43 bar.
- To start the HP test, with level 3 access, go into the "HP TEST CIRCUIT x" menu and confirm with "YES".
The sequence then starts automatically:
• The evaporator pump starts followed by 1 compressor.
• The On/Off LED flashes 75/25.
• The condenser pump stops.
• When the flow switch is closed, the available compressors start up.
• The On/Off key is disabled for the duration of the HP test.
• The remote On/Off function is also disabled.
b) End of the procedure
The HP test stops once one of the following conditions is met:
- It has been interrupted by setting the parameter "HP_TEST" to NO.
- The HP pressure switch is open, in which case, the HP test is confirmed.

CONNECT2 EN-56
9 - MANAGEMENT OF THE ON/OFF INPUTS

9.1 - Automatic machine operation control

This input is used by the customer. This control allows customers to remotely prevent the machine from operating.
- The On/Off LED flashes when this control is on.
- Message on display: SHUT OFF BY MACHINE AUTO CONTROL
Contact state: closed or connected by a jumper (automatic machine operation control = Yes)

9.2 - Load shedding control

The load shedding controls on the main board are used to turn off the stages on circuit 1.
The load shedding controls on the main board are used to turn off the stages on circuit 2.
■ The stages to be shut off are selected by :
- Balancing the runtimes (P175 = Automatic) and the number of closed inputs. Associated message: “NO. STAGES TO BE SHUT
OFF”.
The controller turns off the stages that have been running the longest.
- Or they can be shut off selectively (P175 = Selective): Input 1 on circuit 1 turns off stage 1 on circuit 1. Input 2 on circuit 1 turns
off stage 2 on circuit 1. Input 1 on circuit 2 turns off stage 1 on circuit 2. Input 2 on circuit 2 turns off stage 2 on circuit 2, and the
following message appears: “STAGE x CIRCUIT x TURNED OFF”.
State of on/off contact: open at rest
These stages can also be shut off via the Modbus protocol (bits 515 to 518). Refer to the communication protocol section at the
end of these instructions.
- If P175 = Selective, OR is placed between the on/off inputs and the information from the bus.
- If P175 = Automatic, the compressors will be shut off by the greatest number of inputs between the on/off inputs and the bus.
Load shedding is cancelled if no information is sent by the bus for more than 6 hours.

9.3 - Water flow switch

The information is sent to an open on/off input on the water flow switch.
Changing the fault management mode resets the number of water flow faults.

9.3.1 - Management for water-to-water units in cooling mode, air-to-water units and reversible air-to-water units
- The water flow switch is read 10 second after pump 1 or 2 is authorised to turn on if P25 = 2 and while at one of the pumps is running.
The contact must remain open for at least 3 seconds in order to detect a fault.
- If a water flow fault occurs during the 1-minute circulation delay (after the last control stage), it will not be managed as a fault
but the pump will be shut off.
■ If ≤ 3 shutdowns occur in 1 hour
► If a fault occurs :
- Pump shut off, compressor and electric stages shut off
- 1-minute time delay (10 seconds in test mode).
- Saved in fault memory
- Machine fault output not active
- Water flow fault relay on optional board in Off position
- General fault LED on console flashes
- Number of faults over a 1-hour period managed.
► Affichage :

W A T E R F L O W F A U L T
X C U T ( S ) I N 1 H
Resetting : The fault is automatically acknowledged after the 1-minute time delay.
■ If > 3 shutdowns occur in 1 hour
► If a fault occurs :
- Pumps shut off, compressor and electric stages shut off
- Saved in fault memory
- Unit fault output active
- Water flow fault relay on optional board in On position
- General fault LED on console lit steady
- Number of faults over a 1-hour period managed.
► Display :

M A C H I N E O F F
W A T E R F L O W F A U L T
► Resetting : Press the Reset button.
■ If reversible air-to-water + boiler (P111 = boiler)
A) If P27 = Yes (pump controlled by boiler operation) :
- If a flow switch fault occurs on the heat pump, the boiler is authorised to turn on.
B) If P27 = No (pump controlled only by on/off) :
- If a flow switch fault occurs on the heat pump, the boiler is shut off.

EN-57 CONNECT2
9 - MANAGEMENT OF THE ON/OFF INPUTS

9.3.2 - M
 anagement for water-to-water units in heating mode
A time delay is necessary to manage this fault. ■ If ≤ 3 stops in 1 hour
This time delay is : ► If a fault occurs :
- Determined by P109 if P108 = depending on control mode - Pump 2 is shut off
- 10 seconds if P108 = depending on On/Off. - Thermodynamic stages shut off; auxiliary heaters may remain on
The water flow switch is read after this time delay, after pump 2 - Saved in fault memory
is turned on and while pump 2 is running. - Fault output off
- If a water flow fault occurs during the 1-minute circulation - General fault LED on console lit steady
delay (after the last control stage), it will not be managed as - Time delay increased by 10 seconds before water flow fault read
a fault but the pump will be shut off. - The time delay value obtained is stored in memory so that it
can be applied the next time the pump is turned on.
- The increased time delay is reset if P109 is changed.
► Display :

W A T E R F L O W F A U L T
X C U T ( S ) I N 1 H
► Resetting : The fault disappears automatically after 1 minute.
■ If ≥ 3 stops in 1 hour
► If a fault occurs :
- Pump 2 is shut off - General fault LED on console flashes
- Thermodynamic stages shut off; auxiliary heaters may remain on - The time delay value obtained is stored in memory so that it
- Saved in fault memory can be applied the next time the pump is turned on.
- Fault output on - The increased time delay is reset if P109 is changed.
► Display :

M A C H I N E O F F
W A T E R F L O W F A U L T U
► Resetting : Press Reset.

9.4 - Fan fault (circuits 1 and 2)

Fan faults are managed in series. As a result, there is only one When P21 = Yes or P10 = Pressure, this input should not be
fan fault input. Faults are read on terminals 5-6 of terminal block read until 10 seconds after the unit is turned on and IS NOT
J6. TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT WHEN THE UNIT IS SHUT OFF.
■ If P10 ≠ centrifugal :
► If a fault occurs :
- Machine and fans shut off by HP safety. - General fault LED on console flashes
- Fault saved to fault memory - Fault acknowledged automatically when input closed
- Fan fault relay on relay board in On position
■ If P10 = centrifugal
► If a fault occurs :
- Machine shut off because fan shut off - General fault LED on console lit steady
- Fault saved to fault memory - Fault acknowledged manually.
- General fault relay on relay board in On position
► Display :

M A C H I N E S T A T U S
F A N F A U L T
Saved in fault memory

X - F A N

► Resetting :
When the input is closed the fault is acknowledged automatically
Special case: a fan fault will turn off units in the LP range (air-to-water and centrifugal fan).

CONNECT2 EN-58
9 - MANAGEMENT OF THE ON/OFF INPUTS

9.5 - Expansion valve fault

■ If P42 = ALCO
This configuration corresponds to using the electronic expansion valve with the Alco driver module and display.
Only fault feedback signals from the valve are managed in this case.
The fault signal contact on the electronic expansion valve on circuit 1 must be wired to terminals 5-6 on terminal block J5 on the
motherboard. The contact on the valve on circuit 2 must be wired to terminals 5-6 on terminal block J2 on additional board 2 for circuit
2
► Operation :
Corresponding circuit shut off when its input opens.
■ If < 3 shutdowns occur in 24 hours
► If a fault occurs :
- Corresponding circuit shut off
- Fault output on
- Saved in fault memory
- Circuit fault LED on console flashes
- Number of faults over a 24-hour period managed.
► Display :

F A U L T O N E X V X
X C U T S I N 2 4 H
■ If ≥ 3 shutdowns occur in 24 hours
► If a fault occurs :
- Corresponding circuit shut off
- Fault output on
- Saved in fault memory
- Circuit fault LED on console lit steady
- Number of faults over a 24-hour period managed.
► Display :

C I R C U I T X O F F
E X P . V A L V E F A U L T
► Resetting :
If the number of faults in 24 hours < 3: The fault is automatically acknowledged after 120 seconds and the fault input is closed.
If the number of faults in 24 hours ≥ 3: Acknowledge by pressing Reset on the console and by closing the fault input.
► Fault memory :

F A U L T O N E X V c x

■ If P42 = VCM (bus link)

Expansion valve actuator and expansion valve board protection :
If any of these four faults is detected on the corresponding refrigerating circuit, the circuit is shut off and the fault is reported.
The circuit may restart when the fault disappears :

B O A R D L I N K F A U L T
C I R C U I T 1 E X V
Link fault in fault memory :

- E X P A N S I O N V A L V E 1 L I N K

EXV actuator fault in machine status :

M O T O R F A U L T
C I R C U I T 1 E X V
EXV actuator fault in fault memory :

- E X V 1 A C T U A T O R

EN-59 CONNECT2
9 - MANAGEMENT OF THE ON/OFF INPUTS

Expansion valve VCM board fault :

C I R C U I T X O F F
E X P . V A L V E F A U L T

F A U L T O N E X V X
X C U T S I N 2 4 H

9.6 - Phase controller fault

The phase controller protects the entire machine. It must be wired to terminals 7-8 on terminal block J5 on the motherboard.
The machine is shut off when a fault occurs on the phase controller (contact opens).
► Fault message :

M A C H I N E O F F
P H A S E C O N T R O L L E R F A U L T
► If a fault occurs :
- Fault saved in fault memory
- Relay in On position
- Phase control fault relay on relay board in On position
- General fault LED on console lit steady
► Resetting :
The opening of the input starts a 2-minute time delay. The fault is acknowledged at the end of this period provided the contact is
closed.
The input is not read during this time delay.
► Message in fault memory :

X - P H A S E C O N T R O L L E R

9.7 - Pump fault

Pump faults are automatically reset. They disappear when acknowledged on the circuit breakers.
■ If P25 = 0 :
No pumps supplied, only pump fault 1 is managed in the same way if P25 = 1
If a pump fault occurs after the last control stage is shut off but before the pump is shut off (1 minute after), the water flow fault is
not managed. Instead, the pump is shut off.
■ If P25 = 1 :
Only one pump supplied.
If the pump fault is detected, the unit is shut off and the following message appears :

M A C H I N E O F F
P U M P 1 F A U L T
- Compressor and electric stages shut off
- Saved in fault memory
- Unit fault output active
- Pump 1 fault relay on optional board in On position
- General fault LED on console lit steady.
■ If P25 = 2 then P2 = air-to-water or reversible air-to-water: two pumps supplied
A) If a fault occurs on the pump that is on, the unit is shut off then turned back on with the other pump operating. A pump fault is
reported

P U M P X F A U L T
B A C K U P P U M P O N
- Saved in fault memory
- Unit fault output active
- Pump 1 fault relay on optional board in On position
- General fault LED on console flashes

CONNECT2 EN-60
9 - MANAGEMENT OF THE ON/OFF INPUTS

B) If a fault occurs on the second pump as well, the unit is shut off and the following message appears

M A C H I N E O F F
P U M P 1 A N D 2 F A U L T
- Saved in fault memory
- Unit fault output active
- Pump 1 fault relay on optional board in On position
- Pump 2 fault relay on optional board in On position
- General fault LED on console lit steady.
C) If the machine is turned on :
- The available pump (i.e. without a fault) is turned on and the faulty pump is reported.

9.8 - Compressor protection

► Operation :
Information is received by the following open inputs :
- Terminals 1-2 on terminal block J5 on motherboard: Stage 1, circuit 1
- Terminals 2-3 on terminal block J5 on motherboard: Stage 2, circuit 1
- Terminals 1-2 on terminal block J2 on circuit 2 ADD2 board: Stage 1, circuit 2
- Terminals 2-3 on terminal block J2 on circuit 2 ADD2 board: Stage 2, circuit 2
These inputs are read 10 seconds after a mains power failure (slowness of switch INT69 causing a fault). They must be open for
more than 5 seconds for the fault to be taken into account.
► Main circuit fault :
- Corresponding circuit shut off; fault displayed on LCD
- Circuit fault LED lit steady
- Fault stored in memory in case of a mains power failure
- Fault saved in fault memory
- Relay in On position
- Stage x fault relay on relay board in On position.
This fault must be acknowledged manually and the motor fault must disappear (closed)
► Display :

M O T O R F A U L T
S T A G E x C I R C U I T x
Saved in fault memory

X - M O T O R S T A G E x C I R x

► Resetting :
Press Reset

9.9 - Manual HP pressure switch fault on circuit 1 or 2

► Operation :
These two inputs monitor the status of the HP pressure switches on each refrigerating circuit.
They are associated with the operation of their respective circuits.
They are read 3 seconds after a stage on the circuit turns on.
► If a fault occurs :
- Corresponding circuit shut off.
- General fault output on
- Circuit x HP fault relay on optional board in On position
- Circuit LED on console lit steady
► Display :

C I R C U I T B R E A K x
M A N U A L H P F A U L T
Saved in fault memory :

X - M A N U A L H P x

► Resetting :
Reset the HP switch manually then reset the fault by pressing Reset.

EN-61 CONNECT2
9 - MANAGEMENT OF THE ON/OFF INPUTS

9.10 - Setpoint selection via on/off input

If the number of setpoints = 2 with selection via on/off input (the on/off input corresponds to terminals 4-6 on terminal block J6 on
the motherboard).
■ In cooling mode :
- If the setpoint is not adjusted based on the outdoor temperature or there is a fault on the outdoor temperature sensor, the control
setpoint = P121 if the on/off input is open or P122 if the on/off input is closed.
- If the setpoint is adjusted based on the outdoor temperature and there are no faults on the outdoor sensor:
The setpoint is calculated using P121 if the on/off input is open. If the input is closed, the setpoint is calculated using P122.
■ In heating mode :
- If the setpoint is not adjusted based on the outdoor temperature or there is a fault on the outdoor temperature sensor, the control
setpoint = P123 if the on/off input is open or P124 if the on/off input is closed.
- If the setpoint is adjusted based on the outdoor temperature and there are no faults on the outdoor sensor:
The setpoint is calculated using P123 if the on/off input is open. If the input is closed, the setpoint is calculated using P124.

9.11 - Variable setpoint via 4 20 mA input

■ In heating mode :
CSG Diagram 1

P126.2

P125.2 4-20 mA input

4 mA 20 mA

STP = Setpoint
Displayed if P120 = 3 and in HEATING mode :

P 1 2 5 . 2 S T P F O R 4 m A
H E A T I N G - x x , x °

P 1 2 6 . 2 S T P F O R 2 0 m A
H E A T I N G - x x , x °
If setpoint adjustment based on outdoor temperature = No or there is an outdoor sensor fault → Control setpoint = result of diagram
1
If the setpoint is adjusted based on the outdoor temperature = Yes and there are no faults on the outdoor sensor:
The derived setpoint is calculated using the outdoor temperature. The result of diagram 1 is taken as the setpoint (P123 or P124).
If P120 is set to ‘3’, P131 automatically switches to ‘No’.
- To reverse the direction of the slope, simply set P125.2 to > P126.2 with a minimum difference of 5 K.
■ In cooling mode :
CSG Diagram 2

P126.1

P125.1 4-20 mA input

4 mA 20 mA

CONNECT2 EN-62
9 - MANAGEMENT OF THE ON/OFF INPUTS

STP = Setpoint
Displayed if P120 = 3 and in cooling mode :

P 1 2 5 . 1 S T P F O R 4 m A
C O O L I N G - x x , x °

P 1 2 6 . 1 S T P F O R 2 0 m A
C O O L I N G - x x , x °
If setpoint adjustment based on outdoor temperature = No or there is an outdoor sensor fault → Control setpoint = result of diagram
2
If setpoint adjustment based on outdoor temperature = Yes and there are no faults on the outdoor sensor → The derived setpoint
is calculated using the outdoor temperature. The result of diagram 2 is taken as the setpoint (P121 or P122).
If P120 is set to ‘3’, P127 automatically switches to ‘No
- To reverse the direction of the slope, simply set P125.1 to > P126.1 with a minimum difference of 5 K
IMPORTANT NOTE ABOUT THIS FUNCTION : operating problems may occur if parameters P127 and P131 are set
to ‘Yes’ and the controller delivering the 4 20 mA signal has its own function for shifting the setpoint based on
the outdoor temperature.
If the minimum value of the signal becomes less than 4 mA, the value of the setpoint will not drop below the
minimum setpoint.

9.12 - Operating mode selection

■ If P119 = 4 (cooling/heating via on/off input) :
The unit is controlled, during water heating or water chilling, based on the mode selected via the input located:
- Between terminals 5-6 on terminal block J6 on the motherboard if P2 = water-to-water
- Between terminals 1-2 on terminal block J4 on additional board 1 if P2 = reversible air-to-water, 1 circuit
- Between terminals 1-2 on terminal block J2 of additional board 2 (cycle reversal) if P2 = reversible air-to-water, 2 circuits
The contact must be closed in order to be able to select heating mode, and it must be open in order to be able to select cooling
mode.
- If P2 = water-to-water, the machine must be shut off via the On/Off button or the automatic operation control and winter protection
must be shut off before the operating mode may be changed
► A fault will occur if the operating mode is changed while the machine is running :
- Unit shut off,
- General fault LED on
- LED of initial mode flashes; fault control contact closed (not stored in fault memory)

M A C H I N E O F F
O P E R A T I N G M O D E C H A N G E
► Automatic acknowledgment :
- The operating mode changes if the change is confirmed via the On/Off button or the automatic operation control.
- If the input returns to its original state, the unit resumes its initial operating.
If P2 = reversible air-to-water, the operating mode may be switched with the unit running. After the operating mode is changed, the
unit will stop and restart in its new operating mode and take into account the short-cycle protection.

EN-63 CONNECT2
10 - MANAGEMENT OF THE ANALOGUE INPUTS

10.1 - Temperature sensor

Diagram of sensors: All sensor faults are taken into account in the fault memory
+5 V +5 V

R = 8.96 K Ω R = 15.4 K Ω

50 k Ω sensor 10 k Ω sensor

■ Water inlet sensor : CTN 10 K at 25°C (if P2 = 1, 2 or 3)

This sensor monitors the water temperature on the exchanger inlet in order to :
- Adjust the unit (water return control).
- Monitor the operation of the unit if the water return temperature is too high (load limiting).
- Display the chilled water or hot water inlet temperature (display range: 40 to 99°C, resolution: 0.1 K).
- Automatic acknowledgement.

E X C H . 1 W A T E R I N L E T
S E N S O R F A U L T J 7 / 2 - 3
- Sensor wire cut and short circuit :
► In cooling mode :
- Unit shut off, message on LCD, unit fault LED lit steady, fault saved in fault memory, fault relay in On position.
► In heating mode :
- Water-to-water unit → No effect on control, message on LCD, unit fault LED flashes, fault saved in fault memory.
- Reversible air-to-water unit and water return control→ Unit shut off, message on LCD, unit fault LED lit steady, fault saved in
fault memory, fault relay in On position.
- Reversible air-to-water unit and water return control → No effect on control, message on LCD, unit fault LED flashes, fault saved
in fault memory.
■ Water outlet sensor on heat exchanger 1 : CTN 10 K at 25°C (if P2 = 1, 2 or 3)
This sensor monitors the water temperature on the exchanger outlet in order to :
- Adjust the unit (to water supply) → (P6 = 1) and (P141 = 3 or 4) and cooling mode or (P02 = 3), (P6 = 1) and (P141 = 3 or 4)
and heating mode
- Enable the frost protection
- Display the water outlet temperature (display range: 40 to 99.9°C, resolution: 0.1 K).
- Automatic acknowledgement

E X C H . 1 W A T E R O U T L E T
S E N S O R F A U L T J 7 / 4 - 5
- Sensor wire cut and sensor short circuit → Fault relay in On position
If this sensor is used for control, the unit is shut off (message from table 1 in machine status menu shown on LCD, unit fault LED
lit steady, fault saved in fault memory). If heating mode is on: the electric auxiliary heaters are turned on if possible and the boiler
relay is in the On position if P111 = boiler).
If the sensor is not used for control (i.e. it is used only for the frost limit), the fault is a circuit fault (message from circuit 1 table in
machine status menu shown on LCD, circuit fault LED lit steady, fault saved in fault memory).
■ Water outlet sensor on heat exchanger 2 : CTN 10 K at 25°C (if P2 = 1, 2 or 3)(if P6 = 2 → two sensors + manifold sensors).
This sensor monitors the water temperature on the exchanger outlet in order to :
- Enable the frost protection
- Display the water outlet temperature (display range: 40 to 99.9°C, resolution: 0.1 K).
- Automatic acknowledgement

E X C H . 2 W A T E R O U T L E T
S E N S O R F A U L T A D D 2 J 4 / 1 - 2
- Sensor wire cut and sensor short circuit → Fault relay in On position
This sensor is not used for control (i.e. it is used only for frost protection; control is provided by the manifold sensor). The fault is
a circuit fault (message on LCD, circuit fault LED lit steady, fault saved in fault memory).

CONNECT2 EN-64
10 - MANAGEMENT OF THE ANALOGUE INPUTS

■ Outdoor air sensor: CTN 10 K at 25°C

This sensor monitors the temperature of the outdoor air in order to :
- Adjust the system based on the outdoor temperature (cooling and heating). If the sensor wire is cut (open circuit) or the sensor
short-circuits, the unit is adjusted to the setpoint value (heating and cooling) and a fault is displayed.
- Limit the operation of the unit based on the minimum temperature in heating mode.
- Display the outdoor air temperature (display range: 40 to 99.9°C, resolution: 0.1 K).
- Automatic acknowledgement

O U T . T E M P . S E N S O R F A U L T
J 7 / 1 - 2
- Sensor wire cut and short circuit :
• Control based on outdoor temperature inhibited; control using setpoint.
• If the unit is running in heating mode and can run with the electric stages, the compressors are shut off, control is on the
electric stages, a message appears on the LCD, the unit fault LED flashes, and the fault is saved in fault memory.
• If P2 = water-to-water, the unit continues to operate and the fault is reported (message from table 2 in machine status menu
shown on LCD, unit fault LED flashes, fault saved in fault memory)
• In all other cases: unit shut off, message on LCD (table 1 in machine status menu), unit fault LED lit steady, fault saved in
fault memory, heat trace cabled turned on, fault relay in On position, boiler relay in On position if heating mode on and P111
= boiler.
■ Frost protection sensor for refrigerant in heat exchanger (1 or 2) : CTN 10 K at 25°C (if P2 =1, 2 or 3 unless P1 = R407C,
P2 = 3 and P3 = 2).
This sensor monitors the temperature of the refrigerant at the heat exchanger inlet in order to :
- Protect the heat exchanger from frost :
• Power reduced if several control stages are used
• Slope of fans changed
• Unit shut off
- Refrigerant frost protection temperature displayed (display range: 40 to 99.9°C, resolution: 0.1 K)
- Automatic acknowledgement

E X C H . x R E F R . F R O S T
P R O T . S E N S . F A U L T J x / x - x
- If the sensor wire is cut or the sensor short-circuits, the corresponding circuit is shut off, a message appears on the LCD, the
circuit x fault LED is lit steady, the fault is saved in the fault memory, the general fault relay is in the On position, and the auxiliary
heaters are turned on if heating mode is on)
■ Coil sensor (A to D) : CTN 10 K at 25°C
If P2 = reversible air-to-water, this sensor manages the freon temperature at the coil outlet in order to:Gérer (lancer et arrêter) un
dégivrage :
- Manage (turn on and off) a defrosting cycle
- Display the coil temperature (display range: 40 to 99.9°C, resolution: 0.1 K)
- Automatic acknowledgement

C O I L . x C I R C U I T x
S E N S O R F A U L T J x / x - x
If the sensor wire is cut or the sensor short-circuits :
► In cooling mode :
Fonctionnement normal, message LCD, led défaut circuit x clignotante, sauvegarde mémoire défaut.
► In heating mode :
- If outdoor temperature ≥ 10°C → normal operation, message on LCD, circuit x fault LED flashes, fault saved in fault memory.
- If outdoor temperature < 10°C → circuit x shut off, message on LCD, circuit fault LED flashes, fault saved in fault memory
■ Condenser hot water sensor : CTN 10 K at 25°C (if P2 = 1 and P141 = 3 or 4) = P258 (if P2 = 1 and P141 = 1) = P257
This sensor monitors the water temperature at the condenser exchanger’s inlet (or outlet) in order to :
- Adjust in heating mode
- Display the condenser’s water temperature (display range: 40 to 99.9°C, resolution: 0.1 K)
- Automatic acknowledgement

C O N D E N S E R I N L E T S E N S O R
F A U L T J 7 / 5 - 6
Sensor wire cut and short circuit :
► In cooling mode :
Normal control, message on LCD, unit fault LED flashes, fault saved in fault memory, general fault relay in On position.
► In heating mode :
Unit shut off, message on LCD, unit fault LED flashes, fault saved in fault memory, general fault relay in On position, boiler relay
in On position if P111 = boiler.

EN-65 CONNECT2
10 - MANAGEMENT OF THE ANALOGUE INPUTS

■ Heat exchanger ambient sensor : CTN 10 K at 25°C (if P2 = 2)

This sensor monitors the temperature inside the hydraulic enclosure housing the heat exchanger(s) in order to:
- Turn on the heaters
- Display the temperature inside the enclosure (display range: 40 to 99.9°C, resolution: 0.1 K)
- Automatic acknowledgement

E X C H A N G E R A M B I E N T T E M P .
S E N S O R F A U L T J 7 / 5 - 6
- Sensor wire cut and short circuit: heaters turned on (relay in On position), message on LCD, unit fault LED flashes, fault saved
in fault memory + general fault relay in On position.
■ Control stage discharge sensor (1, 2, 3 or 4) : CTN 50 K at 25°C (all configurations)
- Monitors the discharge temperature on the compressors
- Displays the discharge temperature (display range: 5 to 150°C, resolution 1 K).

D . T E M P . S E N S O R X F A U L T
J x / x - x
- If the sensor wire is cut (check 5 minutes after compressor turned on) and the sensor short-circuits (continuous monitoring), the
corresponding control stage is turned off and the auxiliary heaters are turned on if need be. If there are no auxiliary heaters, the
boiler relay moves to the On position if P111 = boiler. A message appears on the LCD, the circuit fault LED is lit steady, and the
fault is saved in the fault memory.
- This fault must be acknowledged manually if the temperature < 145°C. The discharge fault must also be acknowledged.
■ Water manifold outlet sensor : CTN 10 K at 25°C (if P2 = 1, 2 or 3 and P6 = 2)
This sensor monitors the water temperature on the exchanger outlet in order to :
- Adjust the unit (to water return)
- Display the common water outlet temperature (display range: 40 to 99.9°C, resolution: 0.1 K).
- Automatic acknowledgement

M A N I F . W A T E R O U T L E T
S E N S O R F A U L T A D D 2 J 4 / 2 - 3
- Sensor wire cut and short circuit :
• If water return control or if P2 = water-to-water and heating mode on (i.e. sensor not used for control):
Normal control, message from table 2 in machine status menu shown on LCD, unit fault LED flashes, fault saved in fault
memory, general fault relay.
• If water outlet control and (cooling mode on or P2 = 3):
Unit shut off, message from table 1 in machine status menu shown on LCD, unit fault LED lit steady, fault saved in fault
memory, general fault relay
■ Circuit suction sensor : CTN 10 K at 25°C (all configurations)
If P42 = 2 (electronic expansion valve on VCM board)
The sensor is connected to the expansion valve board and the temperature information is transmitted over the bus link.
The sensor monitors the suction temperature in order to:
- Display the superheat temperature (display range: 40 to 99.9°C, resolution: 0.1 K)
- Automatic acknowledgement
- If the sensor wire is cut or the sensor short-circuits:
• If P43 = No: a secondary fault is displayed, the fault LED flashes; the circuit fault relay is in the On position and the fault is
automatically acknowledged
• If P43 = Yes: The corresponding circuit is turned off and the auxiliary heaters are turned on if need be. If there are no auxiliary
heaters, the boiler relay moves to the On position.
If P111 = Boiler. A message appears on the LCD, the circuit fault LED is lit steady, and the fault is saved in the fault memory
and automatically acknowledged
► Fault message :

S U C T I O N T E M P . S E N S O R
F A U L T C I R C U I . x J x / x x - x x
■ Circuit liquid sensor : CTN 10 K at 25°C (all configurations)
This sensor measures the liquid temperature in order to:
- Display the subcooling temperature (display range: 40 to 99.9°C, resolution: 0.1 K)
- Automatic acknowledgement
- If the sensor wire is cut or the sensor short-circuits, a secondary fault is displayed, the fault LED flashes, the circuit fault relay
is in the On position, and the fault is automatically acknowledged
► Fault message :

L I Q U I D T E M P . S E N S O R . x
F A U L T C I R C . x J x / x x - x x
■ Fault detection values :
- For the 50 K sensors: Cut-off fault (or sensor absent) if < 5°C and the unit has been operating for 5 minutes, and sensor short-
circuit if > 148 °C.
- For the 10 K sensors: Cut-off fault (or sensor absent) if < 40°C and sensor short-circuit if > 99°C.

CONNECT2 EN-66
10 - MANAGEMENT OF THE ANALOGUE INPUTS

■ Correspondence table :
SENSOR RESISTANCE Ω
Temperature (°C) DISCHARGE SENSOR CONTROL AND OUTDOOR
50 KΩ SENSOR 10 KΩ
10 - 55340
-5 - 42340
0 162250 32660
5 126977 25400
10 99517 19900
15 78570 15710
20 62468 12490
25 50000 10000
30 40280 8058
35 32650 6532
40 26624 5326
45 21834 4368
50 18005 3602

10.2 - Pressure sensor

The high and low values for the HP/LP pressure sensors are given below:
The sensors are adjusted using parameters P30 to P39.
Measurement range :

Low value from High value to

P31 P30 HP1

P33 P32 HP2
P37 P36 BP1
P39 P38 BP2
- Power supply: 5 V DC
- Signal: 0.5 - 4.5 V
Pressure Calculation
with adjustment

High value

Low value

Voltage
0.5 V 4.5 V

Short-circuit faults will be detected by a voltage ≥ 4.75 V.

This is not taken into account for the low-pressure sensors of each circuit when the unit has stopped or is in the defrosting phase.
For LP sensors, this fault is taken into account following a time delay of 120 s from start-up.
Open-circuit faults will be detected by a voltage ≤ 0.25 V.
The pressure values given are for relative pressure
■ The HP sensor will :
- Monitor the HP pressure in the circuit and relay this information
- Control the unit using the HP
- Control the condensing pressure
■ The LP sensor will :
- Monitor the LP pressure in the circuit and relay this information
- Monitor for refrigerant leaks before turning on stages.

EN-67 CONNECT2
10 - MANAGEMENT OF THE ANALOGUE INPUTS

When reading the operation parameters for the pressure levels while the machine is on, the sensors can be adjusted with the OK
button if there is a difference between a value that is read and the corresponding value measured by a pressure gauge.
Exemple :

P 3 x x H P x P R E S S U R E ↑
x x . x b ↓
Press OK to access and change the adjustment value.

S E N S O R A D J U S T M E N T H P x
x x . x b 0 . 0 b [- 1 + 2.5] 0 by default

Press OK to confirm the new adjustment value and go back to the operation parameter.
Press ESC to cancel any changes made and go back to the operation parameter.
This readjustment will be used to correct the difference between the value measured by a pressure sensor and the value read on
a pressure gauge.
The resulting new slope will then be used for control.

CONNECT2 EN-68
11 - MANAGEMENT OF THE WATER PUMPS

11.1 - Pump 1
Pump 1 is assigned to the main hydraulic network. Therefore, it is used in all configurations:
- If P2 = air-to-water or reversible air-to-water and P25 = 2, it will be managed alternately with Pump 2.
The pump that has run for the shortest amount of time starts up first.
- Otherwise, the pumps may be turned on using the On/Off button (and automatic operation control input closed).
The pump is shut off 1 minute after the last control stage turns off.

11.2 - Pump 2
Pump 2 is used only in certain configurations :
A) If P2 = water-to-water, pump 2 is assigned to the customer’s secondary network and its control mode is determined by P108.
- If P108 = depending on control mode, the pump control is linked to the unit control :
Pump x is turned on before the first control stage (where x is the value entered in P109).
The pump is shut off 1 minute after the last control stage turns off.

P U M P x O N
x x s
Automatic time delay countdown.
This time delay is maintained during test mode.
- If P108 = depending on On/Off, the pump control is linked to the operation of the unit.:
• The pump is turned on (via On/Off and with the automatic operation control input closed; or via On/Off, with the automatic
operation control input closed and winter protection activated by outdoor temperature; or remotely via a PC, modem or other).
- The pump is immediately turned off when P108 is changed and switches from On/Off control to Depending on control mode
(unless control mode called for).
- The pump is shut off 1 minute after the last control stage turns off.
B) If P2 = air-to-water or reversible air-to-water, it depends on P25
- If P25 = 0 or 1 (only one pump supplied.) there is no pump 2.
- If P25 = 2, the unit is supplied with a backup pump. This pump is managed by On/Off control and runs alternately with pump 1.
The pump that has run for the shortest amount of time starts up first.
The next time the machine is turned off by the control after 7 days of operation with the same pump, the pumps are switched
(by turning off the one that was running) in order to balance the runtimes.
The pump is shut off 1 minute after the last control stage turns off.

11.3 - Pump management if P2 = 3 (reversible air-to-water) + heating mode + P111 = boiler

Parameter P27 is used to have the pump controlled by the operation of the boiler.
A) If P27 = Yes: When the boiler is turned on, the pump is shut off unless there is a risk of the unit freezing (outdoor temperature
≤ P52 and P261 ≤ 30°C)
A tank with four nozzles must be installed on the system and the boiler must have its own pump and its own control with its own
protections

P 2 7 P U M P C O N T R O L L E D
B Y B O I L E R Y E S
The boiler will continue to operate if the heat pump malfunctions.
B) If P27 = No: The pump is controlled by the On/Off button. It continues to run even when the boiler is authorised to operate.

P 2 7 P U M P C O N T R O L L E D
B Y B O I L E R N O

11.4 - Unseizing and switching the pumps

If any of the pumps remains off (for a reason other than a fault) for over 7 days, it must be turned on between 9.00 am and 9.00
pm and be allowed to run for 2 minutes.
- If P25 = 2, the pump with the longest runtime is turned off after being unseized.
- If the unit is turned off via the On/Off button or the automatic operation control and a water flow fault occurs during unseizing,
both pumps are turned off.

EN-69 CONNECT2
11 - MANAGEMENT OF THE WATER PUMPS

11.5 - Actuation of variable-speed pump 1 on water-to-water machines via the 0/10V output:
Addition of functions necessary for actuation of pump 1 (indoor network), not supplied, in variable speed mode using a 0/10V output with
a PID algorithm.
The aim of this function is to maintain a constant temperature difference between the water outlet and inlet in COOLING mode on the
evaporator when this is possible as the machine output varies.
In heating modes, a fixed speed is imposed on the pump.

V3V

C E

PUMP 2 LG PUMP 1

Outdoor network Indoor network

11.5.1 - Outputs used: :

- Terminal strip J2 on the motherboard (analogue outputs)
- Terminals 3-4 (0V): 0-10 V output no.2 Pump 1 actuation indoor network customer application evaporator side in COOLING
control mode and condenser in HEATING mode

11.5.2 - Parameters :
These parameters will only be visible if the machine type P2=water-to-water.
P240.1: Evaporator delta T setpoint, pump 1 in COOLING mode and pump 2 in HEATING mode

P 2 4 0 . 1 E V A P O R T O R
D E L T A T S E T P O I N T x . x
P240.9: Pump 1 speed in HEATING mode

P 2 4 0 . 9 H O T M O D E P U M P 1
S P E E D 0 %
11.5.3 - PUMP 1 setting :
P240: Pump 1 variable speed control

P 2 4 0 V A R I A B L E S P E E D
P U M P 1 N O
P240.2: Pump 1 proportional gain

P 2 4 0 . 2 P G A I N P U M P 1
x x . x
P240.3: Pump 1 integral gain

P 2 4 0 . 3 G A I N P U M P 1
x . x
P240.4: Pump 1 derivative gain

P 2 4 0 . 4 D G A I N P U M P 1
x . x
P240.5: Pump 1, boost mode

P 2 4 0 . 5 B O O S T M O D E
P U M P 1 N O N

CONNECT2 EN-70
11 - MANAGEMENT OF THE WATER PUMPS

P240.6: Pump 1, boost mode max. speed

P 2 4 0 . 6 M A X S P E E D
B O O S T M O D E P U M P 1 1 0 0 %
P240.7: Pump 1, STANDARD mode min. speed

P 2 4 0 . 7 M I N I S P E E D P 1
S E R P T : X X X % M O T O R : x x x %
Note: The minimum speed setpoint must be set based on the specifications for the pump and the minimum acceptable
flow rate for the evaporator (water flow safety device cut-off)..

P240.8: Pump 1, STANDARD mode max. speed

P 2 4 0 . 8 M A X I S P E E D
P U M P 1 0 %

11.5.4 - PUMP 1 reading :

P580: Pump 1 speed variation mode

P 5 8 0 S P E E D V A R I A B L E
M O D E P U M P 1 B O O S T
P581: Pump 1 speed

P 5 8 1 P U M P 1 S P E E D
x x x %

11.5.5 - Operating principle :

- The controller provides one 0-10 V signal so that it can actuate the pump installed by the customer on the indoor circuit (one
pump).
- The pump is actuated based on the temperature difference between the evaporator water outlet in COOLING control mode; in
heating mode, a fixed speed set by the parameter P240.9 is imposed on the pump.
- The control will return the pump speed value (in %) using a PID controller, based on the control mode selected.
- The speed value calculated in % by the controller is converted into an analogue signal (0/10V) to control the pump.
- A PID loop is applied to control the analogue outputs.
- The default sampling frequency of the PID is 1 second.
- The PID can be configured and must be adapted for each site.

11.5.6 - Water pump control :

► In COOLING mode :
- Pump 1 is actuated by the evaporator ΔT.
► In HEATING mode :
The speed of pump 1 is set at the value configured using the parameter P240.9.
- The actuation of the 0/10V signal for pump 1 is identical to that for the pump 1 binary outputs for water-towater machines.
- Conditions, pump OFF, 0V signal; conditions pump ON, control of the ΔT in PID.
- The pump is started with an actuation voltage of 10V.
- The PID algorithm for managing the ΔT only produces an action 10 s after being triggered and 60 s after a thermodynamic
control stage is stopped.
- In the event of a cut-out on the water flow rate safety, the min. voltage which can be imposed on pump 1 in COOLING mode is
that stored before the cut-out +10%; a message is sent on the console.
To enable this, the actuation voltage for the pump is stored before a control stage is stopped.

F O R C E D M I N I S P E E D
P U M P X x x x %
- To ensure the minimum flow rate value accessible by the pump is that set by the parameters P240.7 once more, go into the
parameter, modify the value if necessary, and confirm with the OK key.
A change in the operating mode (HEATING/COOLING) also cancels the override function.
The values CONS (setpoint) and MOTOR will then be the same.

11.5.7 - Boost mode :

- The control for the indoor pump (pump 1) is forced to boost mode max speed in HEATING mode if there is a HP cut-off and in
COOLING mode if there is a frost protection cut-off.
- The pump output speed will always be between the values set in the parameters P240.7 and P240.8 in both Normal and Boost
mode.

EN-71 CONNECT2
12 - WINTER PROTECTION

12.1 - Frost protection of pumps and heat exchangers while unit is off
This function protects the pump(s) and the heat exchanger(s) from freezing.
The heater and heat trace cable outputs are enabled only when P2 = air-to-water and reversible air-to-water.
P265 becomes visible if P2 = air-to-water and reversible air-to-water

12.1.1 - Use with pure water: If P52 ≥ its standard adjustment value based on the refrigerant type :
1) Heater control : 2) Heat trace cable control :
- If exchanger ambient temperature ≤ P220 or ambient temp. - If outdoor temperature sensor ≤ P220 and water inlet
sensor fault and water inlet temperature≤ (P52 + 2) + all temperature ≤ 20°C + all compressors off + pump off if P25
compressors off + pump off if P25 ≠ 0 → Heaters on. ≠ 0 → Heat trace cables on
- If ambient temperature sensor fault and water inlet temperature - If outdoor temperature sensor fault and water inlet temperature
≤ (P52 + 2) + all compressors off + pump off if P25 ≠ 0 → ≤ 20°C + all compressors off + pump off if P25 ≠ 0 → Heat
Heaters on. trace cables on
- If exchanger ambient temperature > P220 + P222 or water - If outdoor temperature > P220 + P222 or water inlet
inlet temperature ≥ (P52 + 2) + P222 or if a compressor or a temperature ≥ 20°C + P222 or if a compressor or a pump is
pump is on if P25 ≠ 0 → Heaters off on → Heat trace cables off.

12.1.2 - Use with glycol/water mix: If P52 < its standard adjustment value based on the refrigerant type :
1) Heater control : 2) Heat trace cable control :
- If exchanger ambient temperature and water inlet temperature - If outdoor temperature ≤ 0 and water inlet temperature ≤ 0°C
≤ P52 + 2 K + all compressors off + pump off if P25 ≠ 0 → + all compressors off + pump off if P25 ≠ 0 → Heaters on.
Heaters on. - If outdoor temperature sensor fault and water inlet temperature
- If exchanger ambient temp. sensor fault and water inlet ≤ 0°C + all compressors off + pump off if P25 ≠ 0 → Heaters
temperature ≤ P52 + 2 K + all compressors off + pump off if on.
P25 ≠ 0 → Heaters on. - If outdoor temperature > 0 + P222 or water inlet temperature
- If exchanger ambient temperature P265 or water inlet ≥ 0°C + P222 or if one compressor or a pump is on if P25 ≠
temperature > P52 + 2 + P222 or if a compressor or a pump 0 → Heat trace cables off.
is on if P25 ≠ 0 → Heaters off.
► Output state displays :

P 4 3 5 H E A T T R A C E
O N

P 4 3 6 H E A T E R R T I E
O U T P U T O N

12.1.3 - Controlling frost protection for partial recovery (desuperheater) or total recovery option :

P 2 9 . 1 H E A T R E C O V . E X C H .
F R O S T P R O T E C T I O N Y E S
Parameter visible only if P2 (unit type) = air-to-water or reversible air-to-water :
► Default value :
- No if P29 (total recovery) = No
- Yes if P29 = Yes
- If P29.1 = Yes and outdoor temperature ≤ P220: heat trace cables on
- If P29.1 = Yes and outdoor temperature sensor fault: heat trace cables on
- If P29.1 = Yes and outdoor temperature > P220 + P222: heat trace cables off.
The heat trace cables will be controlled by output 4 on terminal block J5 on additional board 1 (1-circuit cycle reversal). If P29.1 is
set to ‘Yes’ and the link with additional board 1 is missing, a link fault should appear.
► Output state displays :

P 4 3 7 R E C O V E R Y F R O S T
P R O T . O U T P U T O N

12.2 - Water loop winter protection

► In heating mode : ► In cooling mode :
This function is possible only if P142 = Yes, the automatic This function is possible only if P142 = Yes, the automatic
operation control input is open and the On/Off button on the operation control input is open and the On/Off button on the
console is set to ‘On’. console is set to ‘On’. In this case the pump is turned on if the
In this case the function must maintain water inlet temperature outdoor temperature falls below P220 and shut off at P220 +
on the heat exchanger at 30°C as soon as the outdoor P222.
temperature falls below 3°C (2 K differential). The pump will be forced on if the outdoor temperature sensor
The return temperature will be maintained at 30°C if the outdoor ever malfunctions.
temperature sensor ever malfunctions.

CONNECT2 EN-72
13 - MANAGEMENT OF THE FUNCTIONS

13.1 - Management of the compressor protections

13.1.1 - Short-cycle protection :

Information from compressor manufacturer:
Compressors are not allowed to start more than 12 times an hour (on/off time of 5 minutes and minimum of 3 minutes between
starts).
The on time + off time will be adjustable via parameter P50.
The auxiliary heaters do not operate during short-cycle protection.
On power-up, the SCP = 0 minutes and the minimum off time = 3 minutes.
In test mode, the short-cycle protection is shunted. The compressor can start up immediately at the end of the pump start-up time
delay

S H O R T - C Y C L E P R O T E C T I O N
S T A G E x C I R x x x m n x x s

S T A G E x C I R C U I T x A T
M I N . S T O P x x m n x x s
The information is displayed only if a call is made to turn on the stage while the time delay is counting down.

13.1.2 - Forced stop of compressors

This function prevents the compressor stages from operating individually.
It is enabled and disabled via the following parameters:
P230: On authorisation, stage 1 circuit 1
P231: On authorisation, stage 2 circuit 1
P232: On authorisation, stage 1 circuit 2
P233: On authorisation, stage 2 circuit 2

13.2 - Management of the time counters

The number of hours of operation in each mode (cooling and heating) can be viewed for each pump and each compressor stage.
The parameters are as follows :
P285: Heating mode runtime (in hours)
P286: Cooling mode runtime (in hours)
P287: Pump 1 runtime
P288: Pump 2 runtime
P311: Stage 1, circuit 1 runtime
P314: Stage 2, circuit 1 runtime
P341: Stage 1, circuit 2 runtime
P344: Stage 2, circuit 2 runtime
There are also monitoring counters: P289, P290, P308, P309, P310, P313, P322, P323, P324, P338, P339, P340, P343, P352,
P353, and P354.
► In heating mode (P285) :
The time delay increments if heating mode is on via the On/Off button and the automatic operation control input is closed or the
winter protection is on with a control stage on.
► In defrost mode (P285) :
These counters are visible if P285 is opened, Enter is pressed on the console and P159 = optimised.
The top line corresponds to the total runtime in heating mode (excluding defrosting). The second line corresponds to the total
defrosting time.
These counters have been added in order to know the gain compared to frosting during a fixed period of time.
► In cooling mode (P286) :
The time delay increments if cooling mode is on via the On/Off button and the automatic operation control input is closed or the
winter protection is on with a control stage on.

13.3 - Management of compressor start-up

Applies only for units with several compressors and if the number of stages on circuit 1 ≠ 1 and the number of stages on circuit 2 ≠ 1.
Parameter P13 is visible only :
- If P3 (No. of circuits) = 1 and P4 (No. of stages on circuit 1) = 2
- If P3 (No. of circuits) = 2 and P4 (No. of stages on circuit 1) = 2 and P5 (No. of stages on circuit 2) = 2

EN-73 CONNECT2
13 - MANAGEMENT OF THE FUNCTIONS

13.3.1 - With balanced tandem compressors :

Before stages are turned on, the runtime of each stage is always checked so that the stage that has run the least is started first.
When only one of the two compressors on each circuit is running, it is turned off after 4 hours and the other compressor is turned on.
► With 1 circuit and 1 stage : No runtime balancing.
► With 1 circuit and 2 stages : The two stages on the circuit are balanced (during operation and at start-up).
► With 2 circuits and 3 stages : On circuit X, the first of the three stages to be turned on is the one that has run the least amount of
time.
On circuit Y, the second stage to be turned on (circuit change) is the one that has run for the second-shortest time.
Then the third and last stage is started.
Then the fourth and last stage is turned on.
► With 2 circuits and 4 stages : On circuit X, the first of the four stages to be turned on is the one that has run the least amount
of time.
On circuit Y, the second stage to be turned on (circuit change) is the one that has run for the second-shortest time.
The third stage to be turned on is the stage that has run for the third-shortest time.
Then the fourth and last stage is turned on.
This function must take into account:
- The stage restriction
- The short-cycle protection
- The authorisation for the stages to turn on
- Compressor faults
The compressors are turned off in sequence,
starting with the compressor that has run the longest.

13.3.2 - With unbalanced tandem compressors and partial-load control :

Partial-load control is enabled on water chillers equipped with scroll compressors with one or two refrigerating circuits with two or
four control stages.
It makes it possible to manage up to six control stages using four compressor outputs.
On machines equipped with unbalanced tandem compressors, this type of control is particularly useful in obtaining the following
breakdown:
If P3 (number of circuits) = 1 → 33%, 66%, 100%
If P3 = 2 → 16%, 33%, 50%, 66%, 83%, 100%
The stages must therefore be assigned on the compressor outputs
Motherboard
- Terminal 2 on terminal block J3, output of stage 1 on circuit 1 = most powerful stage on circuit 1
- Terminal 3 on terminal block J3, output of stage 2 on circuit 1 = most powerful stage on circuit 1
Additional board 2, circuit 2 function
- Terminal 2 on terminal block J3, output of stage 1 on circuit 2 = most powerful stage on circuit 2
- Terminal 3 on terminal block J3, output of stage 2 on circuit 2 = most powerful stage on circuit 2
► With 1 circuit and 1 stage : No partial-load operation
►W
 ith 2 circuits and 3 stages : No partial-load operation as the compressors are of the same size (LGN and LJA range). The
compressor that has run the least is turned on first.
This function must take into account :
- The stage restriction,
- The short-cycle protection,
- The authorisation for the stages to turn on
- Compressor faults
■ Compressor switching management :
When only one of the two compressors on each circuit is running, it is turned off after 4 hours and the other compressor is turned on.
■ Short-cycle protection management (SCP) :
- Call for power :
If the only available stage is in SCP mode, the machine remains in its current state and SCP is indicated by the flashing LED on
the console.
Before stages are turned on, the runtime of each stage is always checked so that the stage that has run the least is started first.

13.4 - Compressor stopping sequence :

This stopping sequence allows you to delay the end of the second stage (the smallest compressor in the case of unbalanced
tandem compressors) in relation to the end of the first stage in a dual staged start under the following three circumstances :
- On automatic operation control
- Following a defrosting request.
- After the defrosting “output” status
The end of the second stage will be delayed by P09 seconds in the three cases listed above.
CLARIFICATION : For machines with two circuits and two stages on each circuit operating at 100%.
If a stopping sequence is requested (on automatic operation control or before and after the defrosting phase with an intertwined
coil): compressors 1 & 3 stop --> P09 seconds time delay --> compressors 2 & 4 stop.

CONNECT2 EN-74
13 - MANAGEMENT OF THE FUNCTIONS

13.5 - Management of the reversing valves

The reversing valves are fitted on reversible units only.
They are managed by the following convention:
- In cooling mode: the reversing valves are supplied.
- In heating mode: the reversing valve are not supplied.
The supply to the reversing valves is cut off 30 minutes after the last stage on the corresponding circuit is turned off. This time delay
becomes 30 seconds in test mode.

13.6 - Management of configurable output P111 :

The output between terminals 9-10 on terminal block J3 on the motherboard is configurable so that the customer can define its
function.
Max. power : The NC contact informs the customer that the unit is running at full power (all compressors and all electric stages).
Boiler : The NC contact allows the customer to activate an auxiliary heater. This type of operating mode is described in section
21 “Management of the back-up boiler”.
Cooling/Heating : The NC contact informs the customer of the heating operation of the unit. The NO contact informs the customer
of the cooling operation of the unit.
Backup on all faults (on air-to-water machines only). The NC contact informs the customer that the machine is either not operating
at full capacity (a compressor is off) or has been shut off following the detection of a fault. The machine will remain off until the fault
is acknowledged with the Reset button.
► Display :

M A C H I N E O F F
F A U L T S O R L I M I T E R U R
- Unit fault output active
- General fault LED on console lit steady
To see which type fault caused the machine to be shut off, go to the fault memory.
List of faults and impairments that shut off the machine if P111 is set to ‘backup on all faults’:
- Pump fault
- Intermediate and final water flow fault
- Limiter on water outlet
- Intermediate and final water frost fault
- Limiter on refrigerant
- Intermediate and final frost fault on refrigerant
- Exchanger frosting fault
- Limiter on high pressure
- Intermediate and final high pressure control fault
- Manual high pressure fault
- Motor fault
- Limiter on discharge
- Intermediate and final discharge fault
- Intermediate and final low pressure fault
- Water inlet sensor fault
- Exchanger 1 or 2 water sensor fault
- Refrigerant sensor fault
- Discharge sensor fault
- Manifold water outlet sensor fault if control on outlet
- Sensor fault
- Excessively low outdoor temperature fault
- Electronic expansion valve fault
- Fan fault if P3 and P180 = 1
- Maximum superheat fault
- Minimum superheat fault
- Limiter on max. air during cooling
- Phase controller fault
- Suction sensor fault if P43 = Yes
- Excessively high outdoor temperature fault

EN-75 CONNECT2
14 - SELF-ADJUSTING FUNCTIONS

These functions allow the machine to adjust itself to certain occasionally extreme operating conditions and thus avoid stops caused
by faults.

14.1 - Self-adjusting function: water frost limit

► Operation :
- Before shutting down after a fault occurs, the unit reduces its power by turning off a stage (if there are two on the circuit), or by
reducing the compressor to half speed. In the case of INVERTER units, they shut off if they are already running at half speed.
- The threshold is detected by the water outlet sensor at P52 + 0.8 K.
- The unit returns to normal operation at P52 + 2 K for 5 minutes and then the HP gradually rises to its set threshold (P181).
- This function operates on each circuit.
► Display :

C I R C . x W A T E R F R O S T L I M
P O W E R R E D U C .
Special case for machines with two circuits and a single evaporator :
- Before shutting down after a fault occurs, the unit reduces its power for minutes by turning off stages
- The threshold is detected by the water outlet sensor at P52 + 0.8
- Normal operation resumes when the water outlet temperature rises to a sufficient level by monitoring the temperature difference
between the inlet and the outlet and the number of stages turned on.

14.2 - Self-adjusting function: refrigerant frost limit

► Operation :
Before shutting down after a fault occurs, the unit reduces its power by turning off a stage (if there are two on the circuit), or by
reducing the compressor to half speed. The threshold is detected by the sensor placed on the freon pipe at the evaporator inlet at
P52 - P53 + 2 K for 10 seconds. The unit returns to normal operation at P52 - P53 + 3.5 K and then the HP gradually rises to its set
threshold (P181).
► Display :

C I R C . x R E F R I G F R O S T
P O W E R R E D U C .
Exception: P08 = “SWEP DOUBLE”:
The limit is detected by the saturation temperature (LP side), at P52 – P53 for 60 seconds if at least one control stage is in operation.
Normal operation resumes when the saturation temperature (LP side) rises to a sufficient level.
► Display :

C X E V A P T . / F R E E Z E L I M . X
P O W E R R E D U C .

14.3 - Self-adjusting function: HP pressure limit

► Operation :
- Before shutting down after a fault occurs, the unit reduces its power by turning off a stage, or by slowing the compressor to 50
Hz, or by shutting off Inverter units for 30 minutes.
- The threshold is detected by the HP sensor at P54-P195 and returned to normal operation after 30 minutes.
- This time period becomes 30 seconds in test mode.
This function is turned on on both circuits at the same time.
► Display :

C I R C U I T x H P L I M I T
P W R R E D U C T I O N x x m n
Special case of Inverter machines in water heating mode :
If the HP pressure ≥ P54 - P195, the controller adjusts the control setpoint so as not to push the compressors near their limits
too often. If necessary, a coil defrosting cycle will be forced on.
Cas particulier sur les machines eau/eau en production d’eau chaude :
Normal operation of the machine turning on the compressor stages resumes if the high pressure and the water inlet temperature
have dropped sufficiently in relation to the point at which load shedding was activated.
Cas particulier sur les machines eau/eau en maitre esclave :
The machine is in Fault mode for the first HP cut-off when a single compressor stage is in operation so that the slave machine can
start up from the first HP cut-off in the master machine.

CONNECT2 EN-76
14 - SELF-ADJUSTING FUNCTIONS

14.4 - Self-adjusting function: discharge protection, circuit 1 or 2

► Operation :
- Before shutting down after a circuit fault occurs, the unit reduces its power for 30 minutes by turning off a stage.
- The threshold is detected by the discharge sensor at value P51 and the stage that was turned off is returned to normal operation
after 30 minutes.
- This time period becomes 30 seconds in test mode.
► Display :

C I R C . X D . T E M P L I M I T
P W R R E D U C T I O N x x m n
Special case for reversible machines in water heating mode :
If the discharge circuit temperature ≥ P151, the controller adjusts the control setpoint so as not to push the compressors near their
limits too often.
If necessary, a coil defrosting cycle will be forced on.

14.5 - Self-adjusting function: minimum HP, circuit 1 or 2

► Operation :
- f the pressure measured by the HP sensor is ≤ P63 for water-to-water units, the controller lowers the circuit’s power to avoid an
excessive drop in LP. Normal operation is restored at P63 + 1b.
► Display :

C I R C . x M I N . H P L I M .
P O W E R R E D U C .

14.6 - Self-adjusting function for high water return temperatures

► Operation :
- The water return temperature may be high as the installation warms up in cooling mode. This causes all the compressor stages
to turn on one after the other and can result in HP cuts and unwanted voltage spikes.
- To prevent this, the controller limits the turning-on of the stages if the water inlet temperature on the heat exchanger is higher
than P171 as long as the temperature does not drop below P171-5K.
► Display :

W A T E R R E T U R N T . L I M I T
U N I T P W R R E D U C T I O N

EN-77 CONNECT2
15 - FAULT FUNCTIONS

15.1 - Water frost limit fault on circuits 1 and 2

► Operation :
- Should the self-adjusting function be insufficient, a fault will occur on the unit when the temperature measured on the heat
exchanger water outlet is at P52 (measured for 15 seconds, or P52 – 1 K).
■ Si moins de 3 arrêts en 24 heures sur ce défaut :
- Corresponding circuit shut off.
- Circuit fault output off
- Frost protection fault relay on optional board in Off position
- Circuit fault LED on console flashes
► Display :

C I R C X H 2 O F R O S T F A U L T
X C U T ( S ) I N 2 4 H 2 4 H
■ If this fault causes more than 3 shutdowns in 24 hours :
- Corresponding circuit shut off
- Fault output on
- Frost protection fault relay on optional board in On position
- Circuit fault LED on console lit steady
- Boiler on if P111 = Boiler and heating mode.
- Auxiliary heaters on if P22 = Yes and heating mode
► Display :

C I R C U I T X O F F
W A T E R F R O S T F A U L T
► Saved in fault memory :

X . W A T E R x F R O S T P R O T .

► Resetting :
- If the number of faults in 24 hours ≤ 3 → the fault is automatically acknowledged if the temperature rises back above P52 + 6
K.
- If the number of faults in 24 hours > 3 → the fault is acknowledged if the temperature rises back above P52 + 6 K and Reset is
pressed on the console

15.2 - Refrigerant frost limit fault on circuits 1 and 2

Frost on the heat exchangers is detected in two ways on most machines.
- Detection method 1: sensors monitor for deviations in low pressure and in the water outlet temperature. Such deviations indicate
that ice has started to form on the heat exchanger. There is no self-adjusting function; the risk of freezing is immediately handled
as a fault.
Parameters P58 and P59 are used in this mode of detection. Therefore, the lower their values, the more the frost protection is
sensitive.
► Display :

C I R C U I T X O F F
E X C H . A N T I F R E Z E
This function can be turned off via parameter P115 in order to perform maintenance.
- Detection method 2: frost is detected by a freon sensor on the heat exchanger inlet :

C I R C X R E F F R O S T F A U L T
X C U T ( S ) I N 2 4 H
► Operation :
- Should the self-adjusting function be insufficient, a fault will occur on the unit when the temperature measured on the freon pipe at
the heat exchanger inlet or the saturation temperature is at P52 - P53 (measured for 60 seconds).
■ If this fault causes fewer than 3 shutdowns in 24 hours :
- Corresponding circuit shut off.
- Circuit fault output off
- Frost protection fault relay on optional board in Off position
- Circuit fault LED on console flashes
► Display :

C I R C X R E F F R O S T F A U L T
X C U T ( S ) I N 2 4 H

CONNECT2 EN-78
15 - FAULT FUNCTIONS

■ If this fault causes more than 3 shutdowns in 24 hours :

- Corresponding circuit shut off.
- Fault output on
- Frost protection fault relay on optional board in On position
- Circuit fault LED on console lit steady
- Boiler on if P111 = Boiler and heating mode.
- Auxiliary heaters if P22 = Yes + heating mode
► Display :

C I R C U I T X O F F
R E F R I G . F R O S T F A U L T
► Saved in fault memory :

X . R E F R I G . x F R O S T P R O T

■ Resetting :
- If the number of faults in 24 hours ≤ 3 → the fault is automatically acknowledged if the temperature rises back above P52 - P53
+10 K.
- If the number of faults in 24 hours > 3 → the fault is acknowledged if the temperature rises back above P52 - P53 +10 K and
Reset is pressed on the console.

15.3 - HP pressure fault, circuits 1 and 2

► Operation :
- Information is sent by the pressure sensors on each circuit. This function prevents manual HP cuts during brief increases in HP
during momentary blockages in the condenser.
- Should the self-adjusting function be insufficient, a fault will occur on the circuit when the pressure measured is at P54.
■ If this fault causes fewer than 5 shutdowns in 24 hours :
- Corresponding circuit shut off.
- 30 min. time delay (in seconds in test mode).
- Fault output off
- Circuit x HP fault relay on optional board in Off position
- Circuit fault LED on console flashes.
- The number of faults over a 24 hour period is managed (P308 for circuit 1 and P338 for circuit 2).
► Display :

C I R x H P F A U L T x x m n
X C U T ( S ) I N 2 4 H
■ If this fault causes more than 5 shutdowns in 24 hours :
- Corresponding circuit shut off.
- Fault output off.
- Circuit x HP fault relay on optional board in On position.
- Circuit LED on console lit steady.
► Display :

C I R C U I T X O F F
H P F A U L T
► Saved in fault memory :

X . C I R C U I T x H P

► Resetting :
- If the number of faults in 24 hours ≤ 5 → the fault is acknowledged after 30 minutes.
- If the number of faults in 24 hours > 5 → the fault is acknowledged if Reset is pressed on the console

15.4 - Discharge temperature fault, circuit 1 or 2

► Operation :
- Information is sent by the sensors placed on the discharge pipes (one per control stage).
- The maximum discharge temperature limit is set by parameter P51 + 1 K in air conditioning and P51 for 1 minute in heat pump
■ If this fault causes fewer than 5 shutdowns in 24 hours :
- Corresponding circuit shut off.
- 30 min. time delay (in seconds in test mode)
- Fault output off
- Circuit x discharge temperature fault relay on optional board in Off position
- Circuit fault LED on console flashes.

EN-79 CONNECT2
15 - FAULT FUNCTIONS

► Display :

D . T E M P F A U L T C x x x m n
X C U T ( S ) I N 2 4 H
■ If this fault causes more than 5 shutdowns in 24 hours :
- Corresponding circuit shut off.
- Fault output on
- Circuit x discharge temperature fault relay on optional board in On position
- Circuit fault LED on console lit steady
► Display :

C I R C U I T X O F F
D I S C H A R G E F A U L T
► Saved in fault memory :

X - D I S C H . T . C I R C U I T x

► Resetting :
- If the number of faults in 24 hours ≤ 5 → the fault is acknowledged after 30 minutes.
- If the number of faults in 24 hours > 5 → the fault is acknowledged if DISCH.T. ≤ P51 – 15°C and Reset is pressed on the
console.

15.5 - LP fault on circuit 1 or 2

► Operation :
- If the pressure measured by the LP pressure sensor is ≤ P55, the controller records an LP fault.
- This input is checked 2 minutes after the first stage on the circuit is turned on. It is also checked when power is shut off but
ignored both during and 2 minutes after defrosting.
- Both of these time delays are maintained in test mode.
■ If this fault causes fewer than 3 shutdowns in 24 hours :
- Corresponding circuit shut off.
- Fault output off
- Circuit x LP fault relay on optional board in Off position
- Circuit fault LED on console flashes
► Display :

C I R C U I T x L P F A U L T
X C U T ( S ) I N 2 4 H
■ If this fault causes more than 3 shutdowns in 24 hours :
- Corresponding circuit shut off.
- Fault output on
- Circuit x LP fault relay on optional board in On position
- Circuit fault LED on console lit steady
► Display :

C I R C U I T X O F F
L P F A U L T P
► Saved in fault memory :

X . C I R C U I T x L P

► Resetting :
- If the number of faults in 24 hours ≤ 3 → the fault is automatically acknowledged if BP > P55 + 2b.
- If the number of faults in 24 hours > 3 → the fault is acknowledged if BP > P55 + 2b and Reset is pressed on the console.
If a fault occurs on the sensor on the open circuit, the fault is preceded in the fault memory by an LP fault.
Special case for reversible machines and water chilling:
the fault threshold switches to P55+1 b and normal operation is restored if BP > P55 + 3 b.
Special case for reversible machines and water heating:
Defrosting is forced on when the LP is < P55 for 1 minute.
If defrosting is forced on 3 times in 1 hour, the circuit with a LP fault is turned off the fourth time the LP drops below P55.

CONNECT2 EN-80
15 - FAULT FUNCTIONS

15.6 - Management of superheat faults

The superheat temperature on the suction end of each circuit can be monitored by comparing the LP saturation temperature to
the suction temperature.
This protection is enabled by setting P43 to ‘Yes’ (No by default). It protects the compressor(s) from excessively low or high
superheat values.
If superheat protection = Yes → This function is turned on when at least the first control stage (per circuit) is on and 5 minutes after
the first stage is turned on.
■ Minimum superheat fault :
- If the superheat value (P307 or P337) drops below the minimum superheat limit value (P44) for 1 minute, the circuit is shut off
and the minimum superheat error message is displayed.
- The unit automatically restarts after 5 minutes (5 seconds in test mode).
- This function remains on in test mode.
► Display :

M I N S U P E R H E A T F A U L T C X
X C U T ( S ) I N 1 H
■ If there are more than 3 cuts in 1 hour :
The unit is turned off by the superheat protection. The Reset button must be pressed in order to restart the circuit.
► Display :

C I R C U I T X O F F
M I N . S U P E R H E A T F A U L T
■ Maximum superheat fault :
- If the superheat value (P307 or P337) rises above the maximum superheat limit value (P45) for 1 minute and the evaporating
temperature < 15°C, the circuit is shut off and the maximum superheat error message is displayed.
- This function is turned off during defrosting.
- The unit automatically restarts after 5 minutes (5 seconds in test mode).
- This function remains on in test mode.
► Display :

M A X S U P E R H E A T F A U L T C X
X C U T ( S ) I N 1 H
■ If there are more than 3 cuts in 1 hour :
The unit is turned off by the maximum superheat protection and the Reset button must be pressed in order to restart the circuit.
► Display :

C I R C U I T X O F F
M A X . S U P E R H E A T F A U L T
► If a permanent fault occurs :
- Fault stored in memory in case of a mains power failure
- Fault saved in fault memory
- Relay in On position.
► If a temporary fault occurs :
- Fault not stored in memory if a mains power failure occurs
- Fault saved in fault memory
- The minimum or maximum superheat fault relay on the relay board is in the Off position
During test mode, the time delays are counted down in seconds, not minutes.
► Messages in the fault memory :

C X M I N . O V E R H E A T

C X M A X . O V E R H E A T

EN-81 CONNECT2
16 - CONTROLS

16.1 - Main control in cooling and heating modes

■ Definition and principle :
The chilled water and hot water temperatures are measured and compared with the setpoint value. Depending on the result, the
compressor stages are turned on or off. This check is performed on the heat exchanger’s water outlet (water supply = PIDτ) or
water inlet (water return).

16.1.1 - Operating mode selection (P119) :

- If P119 = 1 (Cooling)
Cooling only.
- If P119 = 2 (Heating)
Heating only
- If P119 = 3 (Cooling/Heating via console)
The operating mode can be changed only with the machine stopped automatic operation control input set to on, On/Off button).
The Heating/Cooling button will be disabled if it is pressed while the machine is running.
- If P119 = 4 (Cooling/Heating via on/off input)
The operating mode can be changed only with the machine stopped (automatic operation control input set to on, On/Off button).
Attempting to change the operating mode while the machine is running will result in a fault :
- Machine stopped.
- Machine fault relay in On position.
- General fault LED on.
- Initial operating mode LED flashes

M A C H I N E O F F
O P E R A T I N G M O D E C H A N G E
■ Automatic reset :
- Either the machine changes its operating mode if the change is confirmed by pressing On/Off or if the automatic operation
control input is open;
- Or it resumes its initial operating mode if the input is restored to its initial value.
■ If P119 = 5, the machine switches between heating and cooling depending on the outdoor temperature :
- This function is visible only if P2 = reversible air-to-water
- When this function is turned on, the minimum heating limit and the maximum cooling limit (depending on the outdoor temperature)
are re-enabled and are set to the following values:
• For a minimum air temperature of -10°C if P7 ≠ INVERTER
-20°C if P7 = INVERTER
• For a maximum air temperature of 46°C.
However, they can be disabled.

P 1 3 6 M A X A I R T E M P .
A U T O H E A T I N G M O D E – x x

P 1 3 7 M I N A I R T E M P .
A U T O C O O L I N G M O D E - x x
Machine STATUS
1

HTG
MODE

0
P137 P13-1K P225.1-2K P225.1

P225 P225-2K P136-1K P136 Outdoor

temperature
0

CLG
MODE

Machine STATUS

CONNECT2 EN-82
16 - CONTROLS

- When an operating mode reaches its end temperature setpoint in automatic mode, the following message is displayed until a
mode is turned on :

D E A D B A N D A U T O
H E A T I N G / C O O L I N G
The two heating and cooling LEDs flash while this message is displayed.
The pump is shut off in the deadband.

16.2 - Water temperature setpoint adjustment

The control mode is set using parameter P141.
Value 1: set to water return.
Value 2: set to water supply.
Value 3: set to water supply with compensation by water return.
Setpoint 2 allows a similar shift if control adjusted based on the outdoor air (If P127 = Yes or P131 = Yes) or allows the control
mode to be changed if P54 (storage) = Yes.

16.3 - Adjustment of water temperature setpoint if P7 ≠ INVERTER

16.3.1 - Water return control (P141 = 1) :

The temperature used to adjust the setpoint is measured by:
- the inlet sensor on heat exchanger 1 if P2 = air-to-water or reversible air-to-water, if P2 = water-to-water and cooling mode,
- the hot water sensor if P2 = water-to-water and heating mode.
The difference between the control temperature the setpoint is compared to the stage differential and the interstage differential.
Depending on the result, it will be necessary to either turn on an additional stage or to turn one off.
Each stage is turned on at 60-second intervals and the shut off at 1-second intervals.
■ The related parameters are as follows:
P143: Stage differential
P144: Interstage differential
P251: Control setpoint
► In cooling mode :
- A call is made for an additional stage if T > Setpoint + SD + (ISD × NSO)
- A call is made to stop a stage if T < Setpoint + (ISD × NSO-1)
Where :
T: Control temperature (measured). ISD: Interstage Differential (P144)
STP: Setpoint NSO: Number of Stages On
SD: Stage Differential (P143)
Exemple : Two-stage water chiller
Parameter settings: STP = 10°C, SD = 2 K, ISD = 1.5 K

Stage 1 Stage 2
On Off On Off
12 10 13,5 11,5

Stage 2

Stage 1

Water inlet temp.

10 11 11,5 12 13 13,5 14
Csg

► In heating mode :
- A call is made for an additional stage if T < STP - SD - (ISD × NSO)
- A call is made to stop a stage if T > STP - (ISD × NSO-1)
Where :
T: Control temperature (measured). ISD: Interstage Differential (P144)
STP: Setpoint NSO: Number of Stages On
SD: Stage Differential (P143)

EN-83 CONNECT2
16 - CONTROLS

Exemple : Two-stage water heater for a water temperature range of 35 40°C.

Parameter settings: STP = 40°C, SD = 2 K, ISD = 1.5 K.

Stage 1 Stage 2
On Off On Off
38 40 36,5 38,5

Stage 2

Stage 1

Water inlet temp.

35 36 36,5 37 38 38,5 39 40
Csg

R E T U R N T E M P . : - x x . x °
S E T P O I N T : - x x . x °

16.3.2 - Water supply control (P141 = 2)

If heating mode is selected with a water-to-water unit, the setpoint is adjusted based on the temperature measured by the hot water
supply sensor. If cooling mode is selected and P6 = 1, the setpoint is adjusted based on the temperature measured by the heat
exchanger outlet sensor. If P6 = 2 in the same mode, it is adjusted based on the temperature measured by the manifold sensor.
The type of control used is PIDτ.
The temperature is measured periodically (τ) then compared to the setpoint and multiplied by a proportional coefficient (P) -- taking
into account the difference between the measurement and the setpoint (D) and the change in the difference between the measurement
and the setpoint (I) -- in order to approach the setpoint quickly.
Formula: EC = P (M-C) t1 + ∫(M-C)*I + [(M-C) t0 - (M-C) t1]*D
M = Measurement, S = Setpoint.
When P146 = 0 and P147 = 0 (standard setting), the PIDτ function becomes PT (the Integral and Derivative functions are disabled).
■ The related parameters are as follows :
P251: Calculated setpoint
P121: Setpoint 1 in cooling mode
P123: Setpoint 1 in heating mode
P145: P coefficient
P146: I coefficient
P147: D coefficient
P148: T coefficient
► In cooling mode :
A call is made for an additional stage if:
DV > +1.0 K for the first stage and +0.5 K for the additional stages.
A call is made to turn off a stage if:
DV < –0.5 K for a stage and –1.0 K for the last stage.
Example: Two-stage unit with a 5°C setpoint, where D = 0 and I = 0.

Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 1

P
Off On
0,5 3 4 6 7
1 4 4,5 5,5 6
1,5 4,33 4,66 5,33 5,66
2 4,5 4,75 5,25 5,5

► In heating mode :
A call is made for an additional stage if:
DV < –1.0 K for the first stage and -0.5 K for the additional stages.
A call is made to turn off a stage if:
DV > +0.5 K for a stage and +1.0 K for the last stage.

CONNECT2 EN-84
16 - CONTROLS

Example: Two-stage unit with a 45°C setpoint. I = 0 and D = 0.

Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 1

P
Off On
0,5 43 44 46 47
1 44 44,5 45,5 46
1,5 44,34 44,66 45,33 45,66
2 44,5 44,75 45,25 45,9

S U P P L Y T E M P . : - x x . x °
S E T P O I N T : - x x . x °

16.3.3 - Adjusting the setpoint to the water supply with compensation on the water return (P141 = 3) :
► Aim :
Allow the control system to anticipate changes in load on the loop by monitoring for variations in the water inlet temperature.
► Action :
Adjusts the controller time delay.
► Principle :
The water return temperature is measured: θt0; evaporator in cooling mode, condenser in heating mode at time t0 then t0 + P151.
The calculated temperature variation [θt1 - θt0] is used to define the compensator coefficient.
The PID control polling time then becomes: remaining time × compensator coefficient.
Configuring the compensator coefficient: The compensator coefficient can be set to between 0.1 and 1. (Parameter P150)
- If the compensator coefficient = 1 → the function is disabled.
- If the water return temperature variation < 0.5°C → no compensation.
The compensator coefficient is maximum when the temperature variation = 10°C between each time ∝.
Compensator coefficient diagram :
Compensation effect

Temperature variation

Example with a compensation factor of 0.5

Controller time delay P148 = 100 seconds
Compensation time P151 = 10 seconds

EN-85 CONNECT2
16 - CONTROLS

Action of controller with Action of controller without

compensation compensation
P148

Time saved by compensation

P151
C

R=0 0.5
(A) 90 s
0.5
(B)
35 s

7.5 s
0.5
(C)

A: 1st compensation result. The controller’s remaining time is (100 - 10 = 90 seconds) × 0.5 = 45 seconds.
B: 2nd compensation result. The controller’s remaining time is (45 - 10 = 35 seconds) × 0.5 = 17.5 seconds
C: 3rd compensation result. The controller’s remaining time is (17.5 – 10 = 7.5 seconds) × 0.5 = 3.75 seconds.
R = 0: Moment when the controller’s time delay = 0.
The two time delays are resynchronised at this moment.

16.3.4 - The related parameters are as follows :

P145: P coefficient
P146: I coefficient
P147: D coefficient
P148: T coefficient (polling time)
P150: Minimum compensation setpoint
P151: Compensation time

S U P P L Y T E M P . : - x x . x °
S E T P O I N T : - x x . x °

16.4 - A
 djustment of setpoint for the water supply and return temperatures (P141 = 1 or 2)
if P7 = INVERTER
The difference between the control temperature the setpoint is compared to the stage differential and the interstage differential.
Depending on the result, it will be necessary to either turn on the compressor and increase its speed or to decrease its speed and
turn it off.
► EIn cooling mode :
- A call will be made to turn on the compressor if: T > STP + Stage differential
- The compressor rotation speed will be progressively increased if (STP + Stage differential) < T < (STP + Stage differential +
Interstage differential)
Conversely, the compressor speed will be progressively decreased as the water return temperature approaches the setpoint value.
- The compressor will be shut off when T < STP

CONNECT2 EN-86
16 - CONTROLS

► In heating mode :
- A call will be made to turn on the compressor if T < STP + Stage differential
- The compressor rotation speed will be progressively increased if (STP - Stage differential - Interstage differential) < T < (STP
- Stage differential)
- The compressor will be shut off as soon as T > STP
Conversely, the compressor speed will be progressively decreased as the water return temperature approaches the setpoint value
The temperature used to adjust the setpoint is measured by the sensor on the water outlet or inlet of the heat exchanger based
on the value of P141.
► In cooling mode :
Corrected slope

10V 90 Hz

STP = Setpoint

0V 30 Hz

0 Hz
Csg Csg + P143 Csg + P143 Csg + P143
P251 + P144 + P144
+ correction

► In heating mode :
Corrected slope

10V 90 Hz

0V 30 Hz

0 Hz
Csg - P143 Csg - P143 Csg - P143 Csg
- P144 - P144 P251
- correction

■ Csg = STP
► Correction management:
Correction is enabled if P7 = Inverter and if P141 = supply and return.
The correction factor is used to prevent the compressor from running during short-cycle protection and too-short runtimes caused
by a lack of inertia in the system.
The correction factor On/Off button is set to ‘0’ at power-up.

EN-87 CONNECT2
16 - CONTROLS

16.5 - Storage control

If P154 = No → The control mode remains standard and may be adjusted to the return or supply line depending on the value of
P141 (control mode).
If P154 = Yes → Storage control is enabled. The control mode is managed based on the setpoint selected:
- If setpoint 1 is selected, the control remains standard and the mode (supply or return) is selected by P141 (control mode).
- If setpoint 2 is selected, the control automatically switches to ‘return with storage’ mode.
This type of control makes it possible to generate maximum capacity at a given time, often when electricity is cheapest.
- One after the other, the compressor stages turn on in 10-second intervals at value P122 + P155. When P122 is reached, the
stages are shut off at the rate of one per second.
- The setpoint 2 LED lights up.
- All limits are maintained.

Heat exchanger water inlet

temperature
P122 P122 + P125

NOTE : Control based on the outdoor temperature is not available if setpoint 2 is selected. It is, however, available with
setpoint 1.
This operating mode is available in cooling mode only

R E T U R N T E M P . : - x x . x °
S E T P O I N T : - x x . x °

16.6 - Control setpoint (P251) management

16.6.1 - If P142 (water loop winter protection) = No :

■ If P120 (setpoint No.) = 1
► In cooling mode :
If P127 cooling setpoint adjustment = f (outdoor temperature) = 0 or outdoor sensor fault; Control setpoint = P121
If P127 = 1 and no fault on outdoor sensor, setpoint f (outdoor temperature) is calculated using P121.
► In heating mode :
If P131 heating setpoint adjustment = f (outdoor temperature) = 0 or outdoor sensor fault; Control setpoint = P123
If P131 = 1 and no fault on outdoor sensor, setpoint f (outdoor temperature) is calculated using P123.
■ Si P120 (Nbre de consigne) = 2 avec la sélection depuis le pupitre
► In cooling mode :
If P127 cooling setpoint adjustment = f (outdoor temperature) = 0 or outdoor sensor fault; Control setpoint = P121 or P122 depending
on selection on console
If P127 = 1 and no fault on outdoor sensor; Setpoint f (outdoor temperature) is calculated using P121 or P122 based on the selection
made via the console.
► In heating mode :
If P131 heating setpoint adjustment = f (outdoor temperature) = 0 or outdoor sensor fault; Control setpoint = P123 or P124 depending
on selection on console
If P131 = 1 and no fault on outdoor sensor; Setpoint f (outdoor temperature) is calculated using P123 or P124 based on the selection
made via the console.
■ If P120 (setpoint No.) = 2 selected via on/off input
The on/off input corresponds to terminals 4-5 on terminal block J6 on the motherboard.
► In cooling mode :
If P127 cooling setpoint adjustment = f (outdoor temperature) = 0 or outdoor sensor fault; Control setpoint = P121 if on/off input
open; P122 if on/off input closed.
If P127 = 1 and no fault on outdoor sensor:
- Setpoint f (outdoor temperature) is calculated using P121 if the on/off input is open.
- Setpoint f (outdoor temperature) is calculated using P122 if the on/off input is closed.
► In heating mode :
If P131 = 0 or outdoor sensor fault; control setpoint = P123 if on/off input open; P124 if on/off input closed.
If P131 heating setpoint adjustment = f (outdoor temperature) = 1 and no fault on outdoor sensor:
- Setpoint f (outdoor temperature) is calculated using P123 if the on/off input is open.
- Setpoint f (outdoor temperature) is calculated using P124 if the on/off input is closed.

16.6.2 - If P142 (water loop winter protection) = Yes and automatic operation control input open :
The control setpoint = 30°C.

CONNECT2 EN-88
16 - CONTROLS

16.6.3 - Management of the setpoint based on the outdoor temperature :

The water controls in COOLING and heating mode are activated by default (P127 and P131 are set to “Yes” by default).
Gradients are managed during operation with two setpoints in the following manner:
Depending on the outdoor temperature, the water control with setpoint 2 is parallel to the control set using setpoint 1. The shift is
equal to the difference between the two setpoints (setpoint 1 – setpoint 2), see the graphs below.
NOTE: Minimum setting of 5 K between start and end of setpoint drift.
► Slope adjustment in cooling mode :
The related parameters are as follows:
P121: Cooling setpoint 1
P122: Cooling setpoint 2
P128: Outdoor temperature at start of drift in cooling mode
P129: Outdoor temperature at end of drift in cooling mode
P130: Maximum setpoint at end of drift in cooling mode
P251 Consigne corrigée P251 Consigne corrigée

P122 P130 + (P122 - P121)

20 °C 20 °C
P130 + (P122 - P121) P122
15 °C 15 °C

P121 P130
15 °C 15 °C
P 130 P 121
10 °C 10 °C
Outdoor Outdoor
temperature temperature
P128 P129 P128 P129
25 °C 35 °C 25 °C 35 °C

► Slope adjustment in heating mode

The related parameters are as follows:
P123: heating setpoint 1
P124: heating setpoint 2
P132: Outdoor temperature at start of drift in heating mode
P133: Outdoor temperature at end of drift in heating mode
P134: Maximum setpoint at end of drift in heating mode
P251 Corrected setpoint

P134
45 °C
P 123
25 °C

P134 - (P123 - P124)

40 °C
P 124
20 °C
Outdoor
temperature
P133 P132
-7 °C 16 °C

- The maximum setpoint calculated cannot be above 60 °C, regardless of the gradient setting.

16.7 - Automated self-regulating control

If the compressor runtime drops below 3 minutes, the stage differential is increased by 1.0 K for control on the return line (maximum
value of 7.0 K). For control on the supply line, the calculated difference is changed by 1.0 K in order to delay the starting of the
compressor. The maximum shift value is 7.0 K for the first stage and 6.5 K for the following stages.
The following message appears :

S E L F - R E G U L A T I N G
C O N T R O L M O D E
If the compressor runtime rises above 5 minutes and the automated self-regulating control is on, the stage differential for the control
on the return line is lowered by 1.0 K until the initial values are reached.
For control on the supply line, the calculated difference by 1.0 K is changed in order to hasten the starting of the compressor until
the initial values are reached.
The function is disabled if the initial values are reached, if the unit is turned off (via On/Off button on console or automatic operation
control on with winter water loop protection off), if a unit fault occurs, if parameter P141 (control mode) is changed and if a power
failure occurs.

16.8 - Control for bus connection to the Drycooler controller in FREECOOLING mode
The thermodynamic unit can control only the cooling return line because the FREE COOLING module adjusts the cooling
capacity using its own return line sensor and by retrieving the setpoint set by the cooling unit controller.

EN-89 CONNECT2
17 - CONTROL OF CONDENSING PRESSURE FOR AIR-COOLED UNITS

17.1 - Control during normal operation or on/off control

► In heating mode :
All the fan stages are turned on at maximum speed:
- Once a compressor stage is running on the unit when P11 = intertwined
- Once a compressor stage is running on the circuit when P11 = split.
► In cooling mode :
- Control mode is turned on as soon as a compressor stage is running on the circuit.
A) On/Off, where P21 (variable speed control) = No, P10 = Propeller and P11 = Split
The fans turn on once the compressor on the corresponding circuit starts up.
P180 = 2 or 3 corresponds to 2 or 3 fan stages per circuit.
- Fan 1 on circuit 1 will be controlled by stage 1, motherboard terminal block J3 (terminal 5)
- Fan 2 on circuit 1 will be controlled by stage 2, motherboard terminal block J3 (terminal 6)
- Fan 1 on circuit 2 will be controlled by stage 1 on circuit 2, ADD 2 board terminal block J3 (terminal 5)
- Fan 2 on circuit 2 will be controlled by stage 2 on circuit 2, ADD 2 board terminal block J3 (terminal 6)
1er = stage 1, 2ème = stage 2, DEE = Interstage differential

1er
2

1 2ème
P181 HP bar

DEE = P184
DEE = P183
1 condenser fan module per circuit = 2 single phase stages

- The two fans 1 on circuit 1 will be controlled by stage 1 on circuit 1, motherboard terminal block J3 (terminal 5)
- Fan 2 on circuit 1 will be controlled by stage 2 on circuit 1, motherboard terminal block J3 (terminal 6)
- Fan 3 on circuit 1 will be controlled by stage 3 on circuit 1, ADD 2 board terminal block J3 (terminal 7)
- The two fans 1 on circuit 2 will be controlled by stage 1 on circuit 2, ADD 2 board terminal block J3 (terminal 5)
- Fan 2 on circuit 2 will be controlled by stage 2 on circuit 2, ADD 2 board terminal block J3 (terminal 6)
- Fan 3 on circuit 2 will be controlled by stage 3 on circuit 2 of the ADD 2 board terminal block J3 (terminal 8)
DEE = P183
1er
2 3
2ème
1 1
3ème
P181 HP bar

VV

DEE = P184 P184

2 condenser fan modules per circuit = 3 single phase stages

1er = stage 1, 2ème = stage 2, 3ème = stage 3

B) On/Off, where (P21 = No), P10 = propeller and P11 = intertwined

- Control mode is turned on as soon as a compressor stage is running on the unit.
- If one of the two circuits is shut off (by a temporary or permanent fault, or control fault or other fault), the fan continues to operate
using the pressure from the circuit this is still on.
When both refrigerating circuits are on, the fans are turned on and off by the circuit with the highest pressure.
- Fan 1 will be controlled by stage 1, motherboard terminal block J3 (terminal 5)
- Fan 2 will be controlled by stage 2, motherboard terminal block J3 (terminal 6)
P184 P184
1er

2ème
3ème
4ème

P181 HP bar

P183

1er = Stage 1, 2ème = Stage 2, 3ème = Stage 3, 4ème = Stage 4

CONNECT2 EN-90
17 - CONTROL OF CONDENSING PRESSURE FOR AIR-COOLED UNITS

C) On/Off, where (P21 = No), P10 = propeller and P11 = intertwined

- Control mode is turned on as soon as a compressor stage is running on the unit.
- Stages 1 and 2 are controlled by each circuit.
- Common stage 1 is turned on as soon as the first control stage for circuits 1 and 2 is turned on.
- Common stage 3 is turned on as soon as the third control stage for circuits 1 and 2 is turned on.

Ref. circuit 2 Ref. circuit 1

2 2

1 1

- Fan 1 on circuit 1 will be controlled by stage 1, motherboard terminal block J3 (terminal 5)

- Fan 2 on circuit 1 will be controlled by stage 2, motherboard terminal block J3 (terminal 6)
- Fan 1 on circuit 2 will be controlled by stage 1 on circuit 2, ADD 2 board terminal block J3 (terminal 5)
- Fan 2 on circuit 2 will be controlled by stage 2 on circuit 2, ADD 2 board terminal block J3 (terminal 6)
- “Common” fan 1 will be controlled by common stage 1, ADD 2 board terminal block J3 (terminal 7)
- “Common” fan 3 will be controlled by common stage 3, ADD 2 board terminal block J3 (terminal 8)
P184 P184 P184
1er

2ème
3ème

P181 HP bar
VVV

1er = Stage 1, 2ème = Stage 2, 3ème = Stage 3

17.2 - Forced and self-adjusting control

Case 1: If HP > P54 – P195 – 0.5, the fans run at maximum speed for 30 minutes and the stages turn on at 1-second intervals.
This 30-minute runtime applies in case 2 as well.
- If intertwined coils are used, the first fan is turned on by the sensor that reads the highest value.
- If split coils are used, the function is managed by each circuit.
- If mixed coils are used, fans 1 and 2 are managed by each circuit. In the case of common fans 1 and 3, they are turned on by
the sensor that reads the highest value.
Case 2: Management of control stage 1 (case of propeller fans with on/off control).
If fan stage 1 turns on more than 5 times in 10 minutes while the other stages are off, increase the stage differential by 4.5 b to
shut off the other stages. Normal control mode resumes (extra 4.5 b pressure eliminated and other stages allowed to turn on) if
HP > P54 - P195 - P196 or if HP > P181 + P183 for 10 minutes.
If the common fan 1 stage (common to both circuits) turns on more than 5 times in 10 minutes and the other higher stages on
both circuits are off, increase the stage differential by 4.5 b on both circuits.
The following message appears when P11 = split and mixed if stage 1 or 4 turns on more than 5 times in 10 minutes :

H P P R E S S U R E C O N T R O L
S T A G E 1 O N L Y
The following message appears when P11 = intertwined and mixed if stage 3 turns on more than 5 times in 10 minutes :

H P P R E S S U R E C O N T R O L
S T A G E 1 O N L Y

17.3 - Fan speed control

The speed of the fans is controlled by the HP pressure sensor and the 0-10 V outputs on the motherboard and additional board 2.
This control functions in cooling mode only in order to reduce the sound level of the units. In heating mode, the fans run at maximum
speed once a compressor stage turns on.
If P21 = 2 or 3 (speed control with energy or acoustic optimisation) the speed of fan 1 on each circuit will be controlled; the other
fans will be adjusted to P180 by the on/off inputs.
The moment the fan starts in speed control mode and the moment the other stages are turned on must be separated by an interval
of 3 seconds.

EN-91 CONNECT2
17 - CONTROL OF CONDENSING PRESSURE FOR AIR-COOLED UNITS

17.3.1 - Variable speed drive (VSD) :

In order for it to adjust the speed based on the 0-10 V signal, the variable speed drive selected must first be supplied electrically
and informed of the direction of rotation.
► VSD power supply :
Power will be supplied, via the power contactors, by the control for fan 1 on circuit 1 (terminal 5 on terminal block J3), the control
for fan 1 on circuit 2 (terminal 6 on terminal block J3 on additional card 2) and the control for fan 1 common to both circuits (terminal
5 on terminal block J3 on additional board 2).
In both heating and cooling mode, these three outputs must be powered as soon as the unit is turned on by pressing the On/Off
button on the console or by turning off the Automatic Operation control. They will shut off after the Automatic Operation control is
turned on or if the On/Off button on the console is pressed.
► Authorisation of VSD operation :
External VSDs (ALTIVAR) will not be controlled by the software. Instead, they will be controlled electromechanically via two auxiliary
relays on the KGs of the compressors (as soon as a compressor turns on, the associated relay sends the information to the VSD).
As a result, running the VSDs without the compressors will not be possible.
In the case of electronically commutated fans (built-in variable speed drive), authorisation for the VSDs to turn on is given by the
board when the fan contactor outputs are in the On position (no relay needed).

17.3.2 - Fan speed control with split coils (P11 = split) :

This configuration requires a variable speed drive for each circuit.
- 0-10 V output, stage 1, circuit 1, terminals 1-2 on motherboard terminal block J2
- 0-10 V output, stage 1, circuit 2, terminals 2-1 on terminal block J6 of additional board 2
Speed control mode is turned on as soon as the circuit is on.
a) P21 = 2 with acoustic optimisation
1 condenser fan module per circuit = 1 stage (1 fan) with speed control + 1 single-speed stage (same as standard)
2 condenser fan modules per circuit = 1 stage (2 fans) with speed control + 2 single-speed stages (same as standard)
DEE = P183
1er
2 3
2ème
1 1
3ème
P181 HP bar

VV

DEE = P184

1er = Stage 1, 2ème = Stage 2, 3ème = Stage 3

DEE = Interstage differential

b) P21 = 3 with energy optimisation (Available only if P42 = ALCO or VCM)

Stage 1
Stage 2

Stage 3

P181

15 % 30 % 70 % 85 %
P183

If P180 = 3 stages: 15-30% and 70-85% for stages 2-3

If P180 = 2 stages: 20 and 80% for stage 2
The values of P181 and P183 must be set.
P181 = 17.8 b for R410A, 12 b for R407C, 11.0 b for R22 and 6.8 b for R134a
P183 = 7.8 b for R410A or 5.5 b for R407C, 5.0 b for R22 and 3.8 b for R134a
In this case parameters P181 and P183 can be adjusted (resolution of 0.1) and parameter P184 becomes needless and therefore
inaccessible.
The minimum value of P181 becomes 16 bar for R410A.
The minimum value of P183 becomes 8 bar for R410A.

CONNECT2 EN-92
17 - CONTROL OF CONDENSING PRESSURE FOR AIR-COOLED UNITS

17.3.3 - Fan speed control with intertwined coils (P11 = intertwined):

Speed control mode is turned on as soon as the unit is on.
With 1 circuit running: speed is controlled by the circuit’s HP sensor.
With 2 circuits running: the speed is controlled by the sensor with the highest pressure.
a) P21 = 2 with acoustic optimisation
P184 P184 P184
1er

2ème
3ème
4ème

P181 HP bar

P183

b) P21 = 3 with energy optimisation (Available only if P42 = ALCO or VCM)

Stage 1
Stage 2

Stage 3

Stage 4

P181

15 % 25 % 40 % 60 % 75 % 90 %
P183

If P180 = 4 stages: 10-25 40% and 60-75-90% for stages 2-3-4

If P180 = 3 stages: 15-30% and 70-85% for stages 2-3
If P180 = 2 stages: 20 and 80% for stage 2
The values of P181 and P183 must be set.
P181 = 17.8 b for R410A, 12 b for R407C, 11 b for R22 and 6.8 for R134a
P183 = 7.8b for R410A or 5.5b for R407C, 5.0b for R22 and 3.8 b for R134a
In this case parameters P181 and P183 can be adjusted (resolution of 0.1) and parameter P184 becomes needless and therefore
inaccessible.
- The minimum value of P181 becomes 16 bar for R410A.
- The minimum value of P183 becomes 8 bar for R410A.

17.3.4 - Fan speed control with mixed coils (P11 = mixed) :

- 0-10 V output, stage 1, circuit 1, terminals 1-2 on motherboard terminal block J2
- 0-10 V output, stage 1, circuit 2, terminals 2-1 on terminal block J6 of additional board 2
- 0-10 V output, stage 1 common to circuits 1 and 2, terminals 2-3 of terminal block J6 of additional boards 2
- Common stage 1 is controlled by the highest value of the two signals on circuits 1 and 2
- Common stage 3 is turned on as soon as the third control stage for circuits 1 and 2 is turned on.
a) P21 = 2 with acoustic optimisation
P184 P184 P184
1er

2ème
3ème

P181 HP bar
VVV

EN-93 CONNECT2
17 - CONTROL OF CONDENSING PRESSURE FOR AIR-COOLED UNITS

b) P21 = 3 with energy optimisation (Available only if P42 = ALCO or VCM)

If P180 = 3 stages: 15-30% and 70-85% for stages 2-3
If P180 = 2 stages: 20 and 80% for stage 2
The values of P181 and P183 must be set.
P181 = 17.8 b for R410A, 12 b for R407C, 11.0 b for R22 and 6.8 b for R134a
P183 =7.8 b if R410A or 5.5 b if R407C, 5.0 b if R22 and 3.8 b if R134a
In this case parameters P181 and P183 can be adjusted (resolution of 0.1) and parameter P184 becomes needless and therefore
inaccessible.
- The minimum value of P181 becomes 16 bar for R410A.
- The minimum value of P183 becomes 8 bar for R410A.
Stage 1
Stage 2

Stage 3

P181

15 % 30 % 70 % 85 %
P183

17.3.5 - Fan speed control if P7 = INVERTER :

- The rotation speed is limited by parameter P192 (default value of 7.8 V). It can be set at between 5 and 10 V (resolution of 0.1
V).
- If P7 = INVERTER, the standard setting value of P181 becomes 13.4 bar as long as LP < 8.3 bar.
- If the LP rises above this value, the HP control setpoint is becomes equal to P181 + 4.4 bar.
- The HP control setpoint returns to P181 when the LP drops to < 7.8 bar.
- The maximum shift in the HP STP is 33.9 bar (recovery function included).

17.3.6 - Forced control of variable-speed fans :

The condensing pressure control can be forced in cooling mode in two cases:
- If HP > P54 – P195 – 0.5, the fans run at maximum speed for 30 minutes and the stages turn on at 3-second intervals.
- During defrosting in order to defrost the coils as quickly as possible. The HP will have to be as high as possible without turning
on the protections.
- Parameter P166 (3 by default) is used to adjust the fan control.

P192

P166 =
1
2
3

0V HP

P54 - P164 - P165 P54 - P164

Adjustment adopted during defrosting (once the cycle has been reversed by the reversing valve). The other fans are off during this
time.

17.3.7 - Speed control of centrifugal fans (P10 = Centrifugal) :

P21 is hidden. This configuration is not available. The HP is controlled via the air blades. Refer to the section on controlling the air
blades.

CONNECT2 EN-94
17 - CONTROL OF CONDENSING PRESSURE FOR AIR-COOLED UNITS

17.3.8 - Speed control of electronically commutated pressure fans (P10 = Pressure) :

This function provides the same functionalities as the variable speed drive described above with the added possibility of allowing
the customer to limit the speed of the fans in order to lower the sound level or best adjust the available pressure.
This function is enabled when:
P10 = pressure P2 = Air-to-Water or Reversible Air-to-Water,
P180 (No. of HP control stages) = 1 = hidden,
P21 (speed control) = 2 hidden,
P181 and P183 = visible and P11 (coil type) visible.
In cooling mode, the speed is controlled by the HP pressure sensor and the 0-10 V outputs on the main board. This applies in
cooling mode only. In heating mode, the fans run at maximum speed once a compressor stage turns on.
If several electronically controlled fans are on the same circuit, the 0-10 V supplies must be wired in series (two maximum).
The speed of the fans is limited by parameter P192 which is set by default to 8 V but may be adjusted to between 5 and 10 V in
increments of 0.5 V.
Control:
Regardless of the value of P11, the control system is on as soon as a compressor stage is on.
- One circuit used: The fans are controlled in response to the high pressure on the circuit.
- Two circuits used: The fans are controlled in response to the highest pressure read by either sensor on the two circuits.
The fans are controlled simultaneously

100 %
Ventilateurs 1 et 2

HP
0
P181 P181 + P183

The cases for forced control and control during defrosting are the same as those described in section 17.3.5.

17.4 - Low Noise control (single-fan units only)

This function is available only on single-fan units, i.e. if P180 = 1. To see if the function is enabled, go to parameter P191 (Low
Noise operation), which is set to ‘Yes’ by default. Visible only if P180 = 1.
This function disappears if a variable speed drive is used (P21 = Yes).
The fan must be shut off when switching from LS to HS and back. To do so, open contact J3, terminal 2 before actuating J3, terminal
3.
LS is obtained by energising fan relay 1 (terminal 2 on terminal block J3) and fan relay 2 remains open.
HS is obtained by energising fan relay 2 (terminal 3 on terminal block J3) and fan relay 1 remains open.
► In cooling mode :
■ If P191 (LOW NOISE) = Yes :
As long as HP < P54 - P195 – 3 b, low speed must remain on. When the HP rises above this value, shift to high speed (cut off
terminal 2, terminal block J3; cut off terminal 3 on terminal block J3; restore terminal 2 on terminal block J3). LS is resumed when
HP < P54 - P195 – 7 b.
■ If P191 (LOW NOISE) = No :
The system must be switched to high speed very quickly in order to deliver a maximum amount of power to the customer.
- If HP > P181 + P183, turn on LS
- If HP > P181 + P183 + P184, turn on HS
Forced and self-adjusting control :
Case1: On if P64 (optimised frost protection) = No
- If HP > P54 - P195 - 0.5, the fans are already running at HS unless the frost limiter on the water or refrigerant line is on. In this
case, remain at LS and let the HP protection do its job.
Case2: Regardless of the value of P191
- If the fan turns on more than 5 times in 10 minutes, increase the stage differential by 4.5 b. Normal control mode resumes (extra
4.5 b pressure eliminated) if HP > P54 - P195 - P196 or if HP > P181 + P183 for 10 minutes.
The following message appears when P180 = 1 and stage 1 turns on more than 5 times in 10 minutes :

H P P R E S S U R E C O N T R O L
H P S H I F T E D
► In heating mode :
The fan runs at HS.

EN-95 CONNECT2
17 - CONTROL OF CONDENSING PRESSURE FOR AIR-COOLED UNITS

17.5 - Total recovery control

The total recovery function and its associated parameters (P29 and P193) are accessible only if P2 = air-to-water:

P 2 9 T O T A L
R E C O V E R Y N O
- P193 visible If P29 = Yes

P 1 9 3 H P S T P S H I F T
I N R E C O V E R Y
Recovery input (10/11 on J6) will be used by the customer to define the operating mode: STANDARD or RECOVERY
Two operating modes are possible if parameter P29 = Yes :
A) Contact J6 - 10/11 on motherboard open without recovery :
- Standard fans controlled based on the values of P10, P20 and P21
B) Contact J6 - 10/11 motherboard closed with recovery:
- The turning-on of the fans is shifted using parameter P193 → The HP control setpoint then becomes equal to P181 + P193
- The control logic will then be identical to standard control using the values of P10, P20 and P21.

17.6 - Management of the air blades if P10 = Centrifugal

This “all season” option will be offered for air-to-water units with centrifugal fans.
■ If P20 = Yes :
► Ø Heating mode :
The centrifugal fan starts up 3 seconds after the compressor, regardless of the HP1 and HP2 values.
The fan is turned off during defrosting. The air blades are always open.
► Ø Cooling mode :
The air blades are controlled by the 0-10 V output (terminals 1-2 on terminal block J2 on motherboard) as shown below :

10 V 2 min

0V
0°C 25°C 0 100 % %

Compressor
start-up order 1
Time
U (v) 10 V
Voltage on Prepositioning
actuator terminals with
compressor off Time
15 s
t1
State of compressors
1
Time
3s
Fans on if HP1 or HP2 < A 1
Time
u (v)
C)
10V f (P
u=
0V bar
Diagram 1 A B Condensing pressure
Diagram 2 C D

Diagram 1 Diagram 2
Value A Value B Value C Value D
R22/R407C 12b 16b 19b 23b
R134a 7,5b 10,5b 12,5b 15,5b
R404a 14b 18b 20b 23b
R410a 20b 25b 30b 37b

CONNECT2 EN-96
17 - CONTROL OF CONDENSING PRESSURE FOR AIR-COOLED UNITS

 One-circuit unit (or fault on one circuit of a two-circuit unit) :

Adjust as shown in diagram 1.
 Two-circuit unit and if the compressor on circuit 2 running for at least 5 seconds :
- If HP1 or HP2 < A → Control shown in diagram 1 and taking into account the sensor with the lowest pressure.
- If A < (HP1 and HP2) < C → Control shown in diagram 1 and taking into account the sensor with the lowest pressure.
- If HP1 or HP2 > C → Control shown in diagram 2 and comparison of:
• Voltage U1 = Diagram 1 (lowest HP)
• Voltage U2= Diagram 2 (highest HP)
And voltage U adjusted to highest value of U1 and U2.
- If HP1 and HP2 > C → Control shown in diagram 1 and taking into account the sensor with the highest pressure.
■ P20 = No :
Output = 0 V

EN-97 CONNECT2
18 - C
 ONTROL OF CONDENSING PRESSURE FOR WATER-TO-WATER UNITS

18.1 - Operation with a two-way valve

If municipal wastewater is used to cool the condenser, we recommend installing the two-way valve so as to be able to set the
condensing pressure to a value that will ensure correct operation of the unit and save on cooling water.
Set P26 to ‘two-way valve’. The valve will open linearly from P197 to P198 based on the high pressure.
For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the kit. To obtain high cooling capacity, set P197 and P198 to their
lowest values. To save on water, set P197 and P198 to their highest values.
These adjustments depend solely on your installation. It is essential that you ensure the correct operation of your unit.

18.2 - Operation with a three-way valve

We recommend installing our three-way valve kit if our units are used with cooling towers. This valve will allow you to adjust the
condensing pressure better and thus optimise your unit’s performance. Set P26 to ‘three-way valve’. The valve will open linearly
from P197 to P198 based on the water return temperature. For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the kit.

CONNECT2 EN-98
19 - R
 ESTRICTION OF OPERATION OF THE MACHINES BASED ON THE
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE
19.1 - Restriction to the minimum air temperature in heating mode

P 2 2 5 M I N . A I R T E M P . I N
I N H E A T I N G M O D E - x x °
- This parameter can be set to between -25°C and 5°C in 1°C increments.
- Default setting: -10°C if P119 ≠ Cooling where P2 = 3 reversible air-to-water and P7 ≠ INVERTER 20°C if P119 ≠ Cooling where
P2 = 3 reversible air-to-water and P7 = INVERTER
This function is disabled if at least one circuit is being defrosted.
The thermodynamic unit shuts off once the outdoor temperature ≤ P225. The auxiliary heaters or the boiler are substituted for the
thermodynamic control stages. The (thermodynamic) unit restarts once the temperature rises to above P225 + 2K.
■ Display in heating mode and if auxiliary electric heater P22 = No and P111 ≠ Boiler :

M A C H I N E O F F I N H T G M O D E
O U T T E M P . T O O L O W
► If a fault occurs :
- Fault stored in memory in case of a mains power failure
- Fault saved in fault memory
- Relay in On position
- Unit fault LED lit steady.
■ Display in heating mode and if auxiliary electric heater P22 = Yes :

E L E C A U X C T R L E C
O U T T E M P . T O O L O W
► If a fault occurs :
- Fault not stored in memory if a mains power failure occurs
- Fault not saved in memory if a mains power failure occurs
- Fault relay in Off position
- Unit fault LED off.
■ Display in heating mode and if P111 = Boiler :

B O I L E R C O N T R O L
O U T T E M P . T O O L O W
► If a fault occurs :
- Fault not stored in memory if a mains power failure occurs
- Fault not saved in memory if a mains power failure occurs
- Fault relay in Off position
- Unit fault LED off.
■ To disable this function :
- Simply press the - button until the maximum value of the parameter appears. Below this value, the following message appears :

P 2 2 5 M I N . A I R T E M P .
I N H T G M O D E D I S A B L E D
- To turn off the function, simply press Enter.
- To re-enable it, simply enter a value of between -25°C and +5°C and press Enter.

19.2 - Restriction to the maximum air temperature in cooling mode

Visible only if P2 = air-to-water or reversible air-to-water and cooling mode

P 2 2 5 . 1 M A X . A I R T E M P .
I N C L G M O D E + x x °
- This parameter can be set to between 35°C and 50°C in 1°C increments.
- Default setting: DISABLED
The unit shuts off once the outdoor temperature ≥ P225.1.
The unit restarts once the temperature rises back to above P225.1- 2K.
► Fault message :

M A C H I N E O F F I N C L G M O D E
O U T T E M P . T O O H I G H

EN-99 CONNECT2
19 - R
 ESTRICTION OF OPERATION OF THE MACHINES BASED ON THE
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE
► If a fault occurs :
- Fault stored in memory in case of a mains power failure
- Fault saved in fault memory
- Relay in On position
- Unit fault LED lit steady.
■ To disable this function :
- Simply press the + button until the maximum value of the parameter appears. Above this value, the following message appears :

P 2 2 5 . 1 M A X . A I R T E M P .
I N C L G M O D E D I S A B L E D
- To turn off the function, simply press Enter.
- To re-enable it, simply enter a value of between 35°C and 50°C and press Enter.

19.3 - Restriction to the maximum air temperature in heating mode :

This function is used to prohibit the machine operating in heating mode when the outdoor temperature rises above a configurable
value.
This function is disabled if at least one circuit is being defrosted
Visible if P2 = water-to-water and reversible air-to-water when P119 ≠ 1 (Cooling only)

P 2 2 5 . 2 M A X . A I R T E M P .
I N H E A T I N G M O D E - x x ° x °
- This parameter can be set to between -5°C and 20°C in 1°C increments.
- Default setting: DISABLED
The unit shuts off once the outdoor temperature ≥ P225.2
The unit restarts once the temperature rises back to above P225.2 - 2K.
► Display :

M A C H I N E O F F I N H T G M O D E
O U T T E M P . T O O H I G H
This limit is not managed as a fault if the machine is shut off because of it:
- Not stored in memory if a mains power failure occurs
- Fault not saved in memory
- Fault relay in Off position
- The unit fault LED is off
To disable this function:
- Simply press the + button until the maximum value of the parameter appears. Below this value, the following message appears :

P 2 2 5 . 2 M A X . A I R T E M P .
I N H T G M O D E D I S A B L E D
- To turn off the function, simply press Enter.
- To re-enable it, simply enter a value of between -5°C and +20°C and press Enter.

19.4 - Restriction to the minimum air temperature in cooling mode :

This function is used to prohibit the machine operating in cooling mode when the outdoor temperature rises above a configurable
value.
Visible if P2 = Reversible Water-to-Water and Air-to-Water when P119 ≠ 2 (Heating only)

P 2 2 5 . 3 M I N . A I R T E M P .
I N C L G M O D E + x x °
- This parameter can be set to between 20°C and 12°C in 1°C increments.
- Default setting: DISABLED
The unit shuts off once the outdoor temperature ≤ P225.3.
The unit restarts once the temperature rises back to above P225.3 + 2K.
► Display :

A R R E T M A C H I N E E N F R O I D
T . E X T . T R O P B A S S E
This limit is not managed as a fault if the machine is shut off because of it:
- Not stored in memory if a mains power failure occurs
- Fault not saved in memory
- Fault relay in Off position
- The unit fault LED is off.

CONNECT2 EN-100
20 - M
 ANAGEMENT OF THE AUXILIARY HEATER BOARD AND THE
ELECTRIC AUXILIARY HEATERS

The auxiliary electric heater board is the additional board 1 with Inputs
the rotary switch in position 2.
It is used to obtain up to four additional control stages in heating

Programmable
mode.

Fault No. 2

Fault No. 1
Example :
When used on a unit with two control stages, the board brings
the total number of control stages to six (two thermodynamic Bus link with
stages + four electric stages). motherboard

Although the electric stages are managed as control stages, the

last control stages will turn on last.
► The electric stages are turned on if : 432 1 432 1
- the thermodynamic power is insufficient 5 4 3 2 1 J3 J2
- faults occur on the compressor stages
- the outdoor temperature is less than P225 J4

2 4 6 8 10121416
1 3 5 7 9 111315
- the water return temperature is too low to allow defrosting
► The electric stages are shut off if a water flow fault occurs

J1
456

RC1
► The auxiliary electric heater board has three separate on/

78
23
9 01
off inputs :
- Input 1 → additional board 1, use in auxiliary heater terminal
block J4 between terminals 2-3 (if the input is open, the electric
auxiliary heaters are shut off by fault 1 and the corresponding
message appears).
- Input 2 → additional board 1, use in auxiliary heater terminal
block J4 between terminals 4-5 (if the input is open, the electric
auxiliary heaters are shut off by fault 2 and the corresponding
message appears).
- Input 3 → additional board 1, use in auxiliary electric heater
terminal block J4 between terminals 1-2
Value of P113 : 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3
- If P113 = DISABLED, the input is disabled regardless of its J5 J6
state.
- If P113 = LOAD SHEDDING, two cases apply
1) The input is open: the electric auxiliary heaters operate
normally
Common

2) The input is closed: the electric auxiliary heaters are turned

Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Stage 4

off
- If P113 = OVERRIDE :
1) The input is open: the thermodynamic stages and the electric Outputs
auxiliary heaters operate normally
2) The input is closed: the thermodynamic stages are turned off
The outputs always close in the same order (1, 2, 3, 4) and
always open in the reverse order (4, 3, 2, 1).

Management of the electrical auxiliary heaters under normal operation :

Setpoint

P134

Setpoint
= f (Text) in °C

Electric Heat pump

auxiliaries only and electric auxiliaries
Heat pump only

P225 P226 Outdoor air temperature (°C)

- If the air temperature ≥ P226: heat pump alone

- If the air temperature < P226: heat pump and electric auxiliary heaters. If a call is made for control, the thermodynamic control
stages are the first stages.
- If the air temperature < P225: the heat pump is shut off and only the electric stages operate.

EN-101 CONNECT2
 0 - MANAGEMENT OF THE AUXILIARY HEATER BOARD AND THE
2
ELECTRIC AUXILIARY HEATERS
Management of the electric auxiliary heaters when the thermodynamic control stage is shut off by a setpoint corrected by the discharge
protection :
- The electric stages take the place of the thermodynamic stages and become the first control stages, and the outdoor air
temperature at that exact moment is stored in memory.
- The auxiliary heaters are set to the initial setpoint if P131 (setpoint adjustment based on outdoor temperature) = No. They are
set to the calculated setpoint if P131 = Yes.
- The thermodynamic stages adjust to the setpoint corrected by the discharge temperature protection.
- Whether the machine is on or off, the corrected setpoint will increase by 1°C for an equivalent rise in the air temperature until:
• Initial setpoint if P131 = No
• Calculated setpoint if P131 = Yes
- When the air temperature is > than the air temperature stored in memory + 2, the thermodynamic stages revert to being the
first control stages and the electric stages are the last and adjust to the original setpoint:
• Initial setpoint if P131 = No
• Calculated setpoint if P131 = Yes
Management of the electric auxiliary heaters when the machine is shut off by a general fault :
The electric stages take the place of the thermodynamic stages.

CONNECT2 EN-102
21 - MANAGEMENT OF THE BACK-UP BOILER

■ If P111 = Boiler
► Management under normal operation :
Setpoint

P134

Setpoint
= f (Text) in °C

Boilers only Heat pump and boiler

Heat pump only

P225 P226 Outdoor air temperature (°C)

- If the air temperature ≥ P226: heat pump alone

- If the air temperature < P226: heat pump and boiler. If a call is made for control. The thermodynamic control stages are the first
stages.
- If the air temperature < P225: heat pump shut off and boiler turned on
► Management of the electric auxiliary heaters when the thermodynamic control stage is shut off by a setpoint corrected
by the discharge protection :
- The boiler contact (terminals 9-10 on terminal block J3 on the main board) is closed, the outdoor air temperature at the time of
closing is stored in memory. P226 takes on the value of the outdoor temperature if it is lower.
- The boiler is set to the initial setpoint if P131 (setpoint adjustment based on outdoor temperature) = No. It is to the calculated
setpoint if P131 = Yes
- The thermodynamic stages adjust to the setpoint corrected by the discharge temperature protection
- Whether the machine is on or off, the corrected setpoint will increase by 1°C for an equivalent rise in the air temperature until :
• Point de consigne initial si P131 = NON
• Point de consigne calculée si P131 = OUI
- The boiler relay is open when the air temperature > P226 + 2.
► Management of the boiler when the machine has been shut off by a general fault :
- Boiler contact closed
- Control with P135 = 50°C as minimum setpoint
- by default, this minimum setpoint must be adjusted based on the technology of the boiler.
► Management of the boiler when the machine has been shut off by a water flow fault :
(Depending on state of P27: pump controlled by boiler operation)
- If P27 = Yes, boiler operation authorised.
- If P27 = No, the boiler is shut off.
Setpoint

P134 Minimum boiler setpoint

P135

P123
ou P124
Setpoint
= f (Text) in °C

P133 P226 P132 Outdoor air temperature (°C)

EN-103 CONNECT2
22 - MASTER/SLAVE CONTROL

22.1 - Case of two parallel-connected machines

For a master/slave setup involving two parallel-connected machines, the machines must be connected by a bus link and one must
be designated as the master machine in control of the slave machine.
Menu 12 (Master/Slave) appears when parameter P28 is set to ‘Yes’.

1 2 - M A S T E R / S L A V E

► Designation of master machine :

P 8 0 0 M A S T E R M A C H I N E
O N L O O P Y E S O U I

Only one machine may be configured as the master on each loop. If the master machine has already been configured
and you try to configure the slave machine as the master, the slave machine’s parameter will be locked and not
be accessible.
Parameter P808 sets the minimum time delay between the turning-on of machines 1 and 2.

22.1.1 - Operating principle :

The master machine sends the following information to the slave machine :
- ON-OFF.
- Heating/cooling mode.
The master machine will not have access to detailed information about the slave machine (fault details, operating readings, machine
parameters, operating parameters, etc.) and vice versa.
If a BMS is used, each machine will have access to all the information on the other machine.
The control temperature is measured on the machine that operates first, which may be a the master or the slave, depending
on availability

The master machine’s BMS link manages information from the loop and the master machine. To obtain information
on the slave machine, its BMS link must be connected.

► Loop description :
- The loop is limited to two units. Both may be assigned to the loop’s operation or one may be assigned as a backup.
- The loop may be controlled in either heating or cooling mode. Switching between modes is managed in the same way as when
a single machine is running (no master/slave control).
- Each machine will be adjusted by its own software and the adjustments made to the master machine will control the units on
the loop in cascade mode.

22.1.2 - General :
In all cases, the slave machine’s On/Off button can be used to cut the master machine’s control over the slave machine.
Once a machine is configured as the master, it has control over the slave machine.
The machine with the most control stages must always be designated as the master machine.
The slave machine’s control parameters become locked when P28 = Yes.
The time on the master machine’s console is sent to the slave machine so that both have the same time.
If communication between the master and slave machine is lost for more than two minutes, the slave machine switches to independent
operation with its own information and displays the following message :

L I N K F A U L T
L I N K F A U L T
► Automatic acknowledgment :
- The automatic operation controls are managed by each machine as if the machines were not linked.
- Load shedding via the on/off inputs is managed by each machine as if the machines were not linked.
- The pumps are also managed by each machine as if the machines were not linked.
Parameters P801 to P810 are hidden if P800 = No (i.e. on the slave machine).

22.1.3 - Management of the functions :

A) Machine operation priority and balancing of runtimes :

- The order in which machines are started is determined based on faults and the number of hours of operation.
- A machine is available when it is off, has no faults, and is authorised to operated.
- The first machine to start is one that is available and has the fewest hours of operation.

CONNECT2 EN-104
22 - MASTER/SLAVE CONTROL

► Balancing of runtimes :
- After every 50 hours of machine operation, the system switches to the machine which has operated the least in order to balance
the runtimes.
- While the system is on (and before it is shut off), compare the time counters of the machines that are running and change the
order number so that the machine with the longest runtime is shut off first.
- If a fault occurs on an active stage (or the stage is forced off), stage “n” becomes “n-1”.
- Stages are shut off in the reverse order that they were turned on regardless of their number of hours of operation.
The total runtime of each machine calculated by adding P285 and P286 on each machine.
B) Backup or auxiliary machine (P801 = Yes):
► Without changeover :
The backup machine is designated by the customer (P803 = x).

WARNING : In this configuration, the customer will have to run this machine twice a year to prevent the pump
from seizing.

► With changeover :
- The machine with the longest runtime and which is off is automatically set as the backup.
- If a partial fault occurs on a machine on the loop, that machine is automatically made the backup.
- If parameter P807 ≠ 0, the backup machine also serves as the auxiliary machine. It is started up if the temperature >setpoint
+ P807, and stopped at 1 K below this value.
► The backup machine may operate if :
- A machine has a link fault
- A machine has a total fault
- Operation of backup authorised if P807 ≠ 0 and temperature > setpoint + P807
On the backup machine the pumps are off, the LED flashes on and off at 1-second intervals and the following message is displaye
:

M U L T I U N I T M A N A G E M E N T
B A C K U P M A C H I N E
C) Forced stop of machines :
This function can be configured to prevent a machine from operating. This selection is enabled by configuration.
D) Water loop winter protection :
If parameter P142 on the master machine = Yes
► In heating mode :
- This function is possible if P142 on the master machine = Yes, if the automatic operation control inputs on both machines are
open, and both machines are set to On. The function must maintain the water inlet temperature on the heat exchanger at 30°C
as soon as the outdoor temperature ≤ 3°C (2 K differential = pump and compressors shut off immediately)(Cascade control on
the return line).
- Adjust water-to-water units to the hot water sensor.
- The heating LED is lit; the On/Off LED flashes.
- If a fault occurs on the outdoor sensor, maintain the water loop at 30°C.
Corresponding message on each machine :

M A I N T A I N W A T E R L O O P
T E M P E R A T U R E A T 3 0 °
► In cooling mode :
- This function is possible if P142 on the master machine = Yes, the units are set to On, and the automatic operation control inputs
on both machines are open. In this mode, the pump is turned on when the outdoor temperature ≤ P220 and shut off at P220 +
P222.
Corresponding message on both machines :

W A T E R C I R C U L A T I O N
P U M P F O R C E D O N
If a fault occurs on the outdoor temperature sensor, the pump is forced on.
Note regarding the circulation of water during freezing weather : the customer must install a bypass so as to avoid creating
a temperature problem during use.

EN-105 CONNECT2
22 - MASTER/SLAVE CONTROL

22.1.4 - Controls :
► Operating mode :
Note : The slave machine’s operation is determined by the master unit (P119). If P28 = Yes, its operation cannot be changed
via the corresponding on/off input, via the console or because of the outdoor temperature.
- If the slave machine has a different P119 value than the master machine (e.g. master set to cooling/heating while slave set to cooling
only) and a call is made for the slave to operate in a different mode than the master, the slave machine is shut off and the following
message is displayed:

S L A V E F A U L T
P 1 1 9 O P E R A T I N G M O D E
The machine is then shut off
► Control setpoint calculation :
The control setpoint is set by the master machine. If a fault occurs on the master machine, the slave machine operates using its
own setpoint and its own sensors :
Return control (P141 = 1 on master machine) :
- The control sensor used is on the master machine. If it is shut off (On/Off by automatic operation controls) or a fault has occurred
on it, the slave machine will operate using its own setpoint and its own sensors.
Supply control (P141 = 3 on master machine) :
- A sensor must be added to the water outlet manifold connecting both machines. To do so, the sensor must be connected to the
slave machine in place of the water inlet sensor on this machine (terminals 2-3 on terminal block 7 of the motherboard).
- The control temperature is sent by the slave machine connected to the water inlet on the slave’s heat exchanger.
- The manifold water outlet temperature is the water outlet temperature on the master machine’s manifold.
- The water inlet temperature on the slave’s heat exchanger is the temperature from the master machine, including in parameter
P255.
- The water outlet temperature on the slave’s manifold is the temperature of the water outlet on the slave’s manifold.
A) Cascade control :

Stage
Machine 1

P805

P806 Stage
Machine 2

STP
Master machine

Note : P804 = Cascade → parameter P143 on each machine becomes equal to 1°C. This is because the interstage differential
on each machine will be adjusted by the value of P143 on each machine.
Machine 2’s setpoint is shifted by P806 relative to machine 1’s setpoint. The value of P806 will have to be selected based on
machine 1 in order to achieve an operating order similar to the start-up of the last stage (see figure above)

CONNECT2 EN-106
22 - MASTER/SLAVE CONTROL

B) Control in parallel with "shifted setpoint":

Stage
Machine 1

STP
Machine 1

P805

Stage
Machine 2

STP
Machine 2

Machine 1 adjusts itself to the master machine’s setpoint. Machine 2’s setpoint is shifted by the value of P805. Thus, the machine
2’s setpoint 2 is machine 1’s setpoint + P805.
C) Water return control for storage (P154 on master machine = Yes) :
This type of control makes it possible to generate maximum capacity at a given time, often when electricity is cheapest. Both
machines are turned on at an interstage time delay of 10 seconds when P122 + P155 is achieved. The machines are shut off at
P122 at an interstage time delay of 1 second.
- If P154 = Yes, storage control is enabled and the control mode based on the selected setpoint is controlled by the master
machine.
Cascade control is used by default for both machines when setpoint 1 selected (standard control).
The ‘Yes’ value of P154 on the slave machine becomes inaccessible if P28 = Yes.
D) Hourly scheduling :
La programmation horaire de 2 machines en parallèle sera gérée par les paramètres de régulation de la machine maître si P27 =
OUI la programmation horaire de la machine esclave devient inaccessible.

22.1.5 - Machine status menu :

If there are no general faults and the automatic operation inputs are closed, a submenu (overrides the fault message) is added to
the machine status menu :

M A S T E R S L A V E C T R L
or M A S T E R M A C H I N E
S L A V E M A C H I N E

EN-107 CONNECT2
23 - ACTUATION OF THE ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE

23.1 - With Alco driver and display

Only fault feedback signals from the valve are managed in this case

23.2 - With VCM driver

This configuration corresponds to using the electronic expansion valve with the VCM expansion board and on which the ALCO
EXV miniboard with the software is connected.
When P42 is set to this value, the control and view parameters for the Alco electronic expansion valve can be accessed.
The compressor on/off signals authorising the expansion valve to move, as well as the low temperature and suction temperature
signals, will be transmitted over a bus link.

23.2.1 - Menus if P42 = VCM :

► Main menu :

1 0 - E L E C E X P . V A L V E

► Electronic expansion valve configuration menu :

P 6 0 1 C I R C U I T 1
V A L V E T Y P E E X 4

P 6 0 2 C I R C U I T 1
S U P E R H E A T S T P 6 ° C

P 6 0 3 C I R C U I T 1
M O P P O I N T Y E S

P 6 0 4 C I R C U I T 1
M O P V A L U E 1 5 ° C

P 6 0 5 O P N G C 1 E X V
S T A R T A I R C O N X X X %

P 6 0 6 O P N G C 1 E X V
S T A R T H E A T P U M P X X X %

P 6 0 7 O P E N I N G T I M E
S T A R T - U P C I R C U I T 1 X X S S

P 6 0 8 S L O W M O D E
C I R C U I T 1 E X V N O

P 6 1 1 C I R C U I T 2
V A L V E T Y P E E X 4

P 6 1 2 C I R C U I T 2
S U P E R H E A T S T P 6 ° C

P 6 1 3 C I R C U I T 2
M O P P O I N T Y E S

P 6 1 4 C I R C U I T 2
M O P V A L U E 1 5 ° C

P 6 1 5 O P N G C 2 E X V
S T A R T A I R C O N X X X %

P 6 1 6 O P N G C 2 E X V
S T A R T H E A T P U M P X X X %

P 6 1 7 O P E N I N G T I M E
S T A R T - U P C 2 X X S

P 6 1 8 C I R C U I T 2
S L O W M O D E N O
Parameters P608 and P618 are visible only if P2 ≠ reversible air-to-water

CONNECT2 EN-108
23 - ACTUATION OF THE ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE

► Operation parameters :

P 3 2 5 C 1 E X V
O P E N I N G X X X %

P 3 5 5 C 2 E X V
O P E N I N G X X X %

P 5 5 8 C I R 1 E X V V E R S I O N
N O . X X . Y Y V C M X X . Y Y

P 5 5 9 C I R 2 E X V V E R S I O N
N O . X X . Y Y V C M X X . Y Y

23.2.2 - Manual EXPANSION VALVE MODE if P42 = VCM :

If Test Mode is set to ‘Yes’ it retains all standard testing functionalities and provides access to the manual override menu for the
electronic expansion valves when – is pressed.
► Manual override of expansion valves : (opening and closing)
If P3 = 1, access to EXV TEST.1 mode only.
Press + and – to change expansion valves.
► Display :

E X V T E S T . 1
E X V T E S T . 2
When either test mode is confirmed (OK), access is to the settings menu is provided.
► Display :

E X V T E S T C X
A U T O

The expansion valve remains in automatic mode the entire time AUTO is displayed. To enter settings mode, press OK.
- To send a signal to open the valve, press + → The percentage immediately higher than the percentage of opening requested
by the controller will appear.
- To send a signal to close the valve, press - → The percentage immediately lower than the percentage of opening requested
by the controller will appear.
To adjust the valve’s percentage of opening to the desired value, press + and -. This percentage can be changed in increments of
1%.
► Display :

E X V T E S T C X
O P E N I N G X X X %
To exit manual mode, press Reset.
The expansion valve will automatically return to automatic mode if no buttons are pressed on the console for 15 minutes.

23.2.3 - Control of electronic expansion valve at start-up if P42 = VCM :

► Comment :
- The expansion valve’s percentage of opening and slow mode (set to ‘No’) are forced when the compressor is turned on.
- The percentage of opening values in air conditioning and heat pump modes as well as the forcing time can be adjusted using
their corresponding parameters.

23.2.4 - Control of the LP sensor :

► If P42 = VCM :
- The LP sensor fault has a time delay of 120 seconds at power-up. It is not taken into account when the unit is off or at the end
of the defrosting cycle during pressure balancing.
- The default value of P36 and P38 becomes 17.3 b.

EN-109 CONNECT2
24 - IMPORTANT INFORMATION REGARDING THE CONTROL OF AN
INVERTER COMPRESSOR

- Parameters P195 (ΔP for power reduction) and P144 (interstage differential) are visible even though there is just one compressor.
P144 (interstage differential) has an adjustment range of 0.5 to 10°C.
- Parameters P145, P146, P147 and P148 are hidden if P7 = INVERTER and supply control is selected. On the other hand, when
P141 = supply or return, parameters P143 and P144 remain visible and are set to a default value of 1.5°C.
- Output 3 (stage 2, circuit) on terminal block J3 on the motherboard is used to inform the variable speed drive of any faults requiring
the compressor to be shut off. As a result, the compressor will be shut off if a fault is detected (the contact opens).
- Start-up time delay: P66 (Visible only if P7 = INVERTER. Default value of 120 seconds. Adjustable between 0 to 300 seconds in
30 second increments). This time delay corresponds to the minimum time allowed for the compressor control voltage to reach its
maximum value of 10 V (value corresponding to the compressor’s 90 Hz frequency). In other terms, the compressor will not reach
90 Hz until the end of this time delay even if it is requested to do so by the network’s heat load.
- Parameter P192 (maximum fan speed threshold) becomes visible. Its default value is 8.0 V.
- The order in which the compressors turn on and off will be given via output 2 on terminal block J3 on the motherboard (stage 1, circuit
1).
- The compressor speed will be adjusted by an 0-10 V modulating signal (output 2-3 on terminal block J2 on the motherboard).
The following protections are enabled only if P7 = INVERTER:
These limitations are due to the compressor technology.
A) If the evaporating temperature drops to or below 20°C for 1 minute :
The minimum frequency in both heating mode and cooling mode becomes 50 Hz until the evaporating temperature rises to or
above 15°C for 1 minute.
B) If the condensing temperature rises to or above 60°C for 1 minute :
The minimum frequency in both heating mode and cooling mode becomes 50 Hz until the condensing temperature rises to or
above 58°C for 1 minute.
C) Maximum pressure difference :
■ During water heating :
If HP ≥ 4 × LP + 13.5, 120 seconds after start-up, the controller adjusts the control setpoint so as not to push the compressors near
their limits too often.
If necessary, a coil defrosting cycle will be forced on.
► Information message :

U N I T Δ P b a r L I M I T
O P T I M I S E D O P E R A T I O N
■ During water chilling :
If HP ≥ 4 × LP + 13.6, the unit reduces its power by either reducing the compressor speed to 50 Hz or by turning off the compressor.
► Information message :

C P D E L T A L I M I T
P W R R E D U C T I O N x x m i n
► Fault function : (enabled in cooling mode and heating mode)
Operation :
The max. Δp threshold is set at HP 4 × BP + 15.6
■ If this fault causes at least 5 shutdowns in 24 hours :
- Corresponding circuit shut off.
- 30 min. time delay (in seconds in test mode)
- Fault output off
- Circuit fault LED on console flashes.

F A U L T D E L T A P x x m n
X C U T ( S ) I N 2 4 H
■ If this fault causes more than 5 shutdowns in 24 hours :
- Corresponding circuit shut off.
- Fault output on
- Circuit fault LED on console lit steady.

C I R C U I T B R E A K x
C P D E L T A P F A U L T

CONNECT2 EN-110
24 - IMPORTANT INFORMATION REGARDING THE CONTROL OF AN
INVERTER COMPRESSOR
D) Compressor driver fault :
Terminals 2-3 on terminal block J5 on the controller motherboard receive signals indicating faults on the Danfoss compress driver.
Only alarms that shut down the compressor are received.
When contact 4-6 on the driver opens, the driver is in alarm mode. The following message should appear on the controller console:
This function is activated 5 seconds after the power is turned on

M A C H I N E O F F
O U T T E M P . T O O L O W
- Compressor shut off
- Automatic acknowledgement
- Fault stored in memory in case of a mains power failure
- Fault saved in fault memory
- Relay in On position
- Compressor driver fault relay on relay board in On position
- General fault LED lit steady

EN-111 CONNECT2
25 - DEFROSTING OF THE EVAPORATOR COILS

An optimised frosting control system has been developed :

Called DEGIPAC (P159 = optimised), it defrosts the evaporator coils only when frost has actually formed on them instead of based
on the frosting time (P159 = fixed). It does so by continuously monitoring the difference in temperature between the coil and the
outdoor air. If this difference is abnormally high, it turns on the defrost cycle. DEGIPAC makes it possible to continue producing
hot water for hours during cold, dry weather without having to defrost the coils. As a result, it improves the seasonal COP.
Parameter P161 is used to advance (if P161 < default value) or delay (if P161 > default value) the start of the defrost cycle.
- Defrost cycle for reversible machines with split circuits (where P2 = 3 and P11 = split)
The defrost cycle is turned on when any of the following occur:
The discharge temperature is too high (see discharge protection in heating mode);
Ice is detected on the coil by the sensors on the coils. In this case, defrosting is performed by only one circuit at a time to ensure
a minimum supply of hot water for the system;
A difference in pressure, where HP > LP +13.5 for 120 seconds if INVERTER compressors are used.
- Defrost cycle for reversible machines with intertwined or mixed circuits (where P2 = reversible air-to-water and P11 = intertwined
or mixed). In this case, defrosting is performed by both circuits at the same time.
Defrosting is possible only when the water return temperature is high enough to ensure that the heat exchanger will not freeze
when the cycle is reversed.
Defrosting is triggered by the low-pressure sensor that reads the lowest value.

C I R C U I T X B E I N G
D E F R O S T E D
- If this temperature is too low (< P52 + 8 K if there are 2 compressors per circuit and < P52+16 K if there is 1 compressor per
circuit) and there is no way to increase it, the unit will shut off, save the fault in memory, and display the following message :

C I R C U I T B R E A K x
D E F R O S T I N G I M P O S S I B L E
- If the temperature can be raised via the second circuit, a boiler or electric auxiliary heaters, the following message will appear :

W A T E R T E M P . R I S I N G
F O R D E F R O S T I N G
- If this temperature exceeds 26°C, the circuit rises to maximum temperature before the four-way valve reverses and stays at
maximum temperature during defrosting in order to minimise the defrosting time.
- If this temperature drops below 26°C, the circuit rises to maximum temperature before the four-way valve reverses and lowers
in temperature during defrosting to prevent frost from forming on the heat exchanger.
Note : During the defrosting cycle, the controller continuously monitors the temperatures and pressures to prevent frost
from forming on the heat exchanger and thus turning on the protections.
This is why the fans may turn on in reverse for certain machine sizes and in normal direction during a defrosting cycle.

CONNECT2 EN-112
26 - HOURLY PROGRAMMING

26.1 - Presentation
This function allows the weekly management of liquid chillers by selecting :
- 6 programming stages (maxi).
- 6 holidays zones (maxi).

26.2 - Definition of the programming stages

Setting :
Starting time
Ending time
Selected days (M.T.W.T.F.S.S.)
Type of regulation: Setting 1 – Stop/Setting 2 – Stop/setting 1 – setting 2 / setting 2 – setting 1/non valid.
Setting by fault :
Starting hour: 0h00
Ending hour: 0h00
Validated days: none
Type of regulation not validated.

26.3 - Definition of holiday zones.

Settings:
Type of zone: non valid, stop, running on setting 1, running on setting 2.
Starting date dd-mm
Ending date dd-mm
Setting by fault Non valid, from 01-01 to 01-01

26.4 - Operation
When putting under voltage or when setting the time, the information on the machine status are updated as a function of the
programming settings.
The user can change the status of his unit (Run/Stop – ½ setting regulation) but if a time range or a holiday zone is active, the
information will be updated at the starting or ending time of the programming
In the case where at least one time range or one holiday zone is validated, the parameter P120 is forced on « 2 per console or
BMS » and cannot be modified.
When going under test mode, the programming becomes non active. When leaving the test mode, the unit status information are
updated as a function of the programming settings.
In case of range overlapping, the running mode has priority over the stop mode and setting 1 over setting 2.
Same thing in case of overlapping of zones
If a programme stage is active (# non validated) and the real day is selected, the status of the unit is as follows :

Status before starting time

Type of programme Status before starting time Status after ending time
and ending time

CSG1 -stop Off Running on setting 1 Off

CSG2 -stop Off Running on setting 2 Off
STP1-STP2 Running on setting 2 Running on setting 1 Running on setting 2
STP2-STP1 Running on setting 1 Running on setting 2 Running on setting 1
If at least one time range or one holiday zone is validated, alternate the message machine stopped or setting/temp with
a message in order to signal to the user that the status will be updated on next status change of time range. Display of
each of these messages for 3 seconds.
■ Message to be displayed :

H O U R L Y P R O G R A M M I N G
O N

EN-113 CONNECT2
26 - HOURLY PROGRAMMING

■ Access principle :
Through menu 9: "9 PROGRAMMING”

9 - P R O G R A M M I N G

- If validated by key "ENTER", 2 sub-menus "HOURLY PROGRAMMING" and "HOLIDAY ZONES" appear.

T I M E T A B L E
D A Y S O F F
Through keys + and – , select one of the 2 sub- menus, then validate with “ENTER”
■ Position of the cursor :
When surfing in the various menus, the cursor is located at the top, on the left.
For modifying the settings, it is located at the bottom right side, last but one character.
- When entering the « TIME RANGE » menu ”
► Display :

2nd line display:

T I M E T A B L E N ° x ↑ N° of selected
spacing, from 1 to 6
Control mode ↓
Unroll the time range with key + or – then validate with key "ENTER"
Once the time range has been selected, the regulation type has to be chosen.
By pressing "Enter", we have access to the setting. By pressing key + or –, the following menus appear.
For validation,press "Enter”.

T Y P E O F C O N T R O L ↑
S E T P O I N T 1 – O F F ↓

T Y P E O F C O N T R O L ↑
S E T P O I N T 2 – O F F ↓

T Y P E O F C O N T R O L ↑
S E T P . 1 - S E T P . 2 ↓

T Y P E O F C O N T R O L ↑
S E T P . 2 - S E T P . 1 ↓

T Y P E O F C O N T R O L ↑
N O V A L I D ↓
Once the regulation has been validated, « days selected » appears

S E L E C T D A Y S ↑
M T W T F S S ↓
By pressing Enter, days are selected: key "+" to validate the day – key "–" to remove the validation.
Set in this order the starting hour/starting minute/ending hour/ending minute

S T A R T O F T I M E y y H x x ↑
E N D O F T I M E y y H x x ↓
By pressing "ENTER", set hours, then minutes.
Any modification leads to the updating of the unit status.
Any type of setting is possible (starting time < ending time, starting time = ending time, starting time > ending time)
If the ending time ≤ starting time, the programme is considered to be ending on the following day.
If one enters in the menu "HOLIDAY ZONES”
► Display :

D A Y S O F F N ° x ↑ N° of zone selected,
2nd line display: from 1 to 6
zone type ↓

Select the n° of the holiday zone to be set by pressing "ENTER”.

CONNECT2 EN-114
26 - HOURLY PROGRAMMING

■ Setting text :

T Y P E O F Z O N E ↑
N O V A L I D ↓

T Y P E O F Z O N E ↑
S T O P ↓

T Y P E O F Z O N E ↑
S E T P O I N T 1 ↓

T Y P E O F Z O N E ↑
S E T P O I N T 2 ↓
Starting day and ending day
Set in the following order:
Starting day /starting month /ending day /ending month.

D A T E O F S T A R T D D / M M ↑
D A T E O F E N D D D / M M ↓
All types of settings are possible (starting day < ending day, starting day = ending day, starting day > ending day)
If the ending day < starting day, the programme is considered to be ending the year after.
■ Operation of holiday zones :
If a holiday zone is active (starting date ≤ present date ≤ ending date), the time ranges become non active.
The unit operating status becomes the one of the active zone (stop, running on setting 1 or running on setting 2).
At the end of the holiday zone, if no time zone is validated, the operation is the one existing at the start of the holiday zone.
Example:
Prog 1: 7-12h STP1-STP2 MTW TF
Prog 2: 10-18h STP1-stop MT TF
Holiday zone: 10-08 / 30-08 : stop

Prog 1: MTWTF Prog 2 : MT TF

Setpoint 1 Setpoint 1

Setpoint 2 Setpoint 2

0 7 12 24 0 10 18 24

Result :
Status: MT TF Status: T

Setpoint 1 Setpoint 1

Setpoint 2 Setpoint 2

0 7 10 12 18 24 0 7 10 12 18 24

Saturday and Sunday not being selected in the hourly programming, the unit is therefore stopped.
The unit is stopped between 10th August and 30th August, this period being selected as holiday zone.

EN-115 CONNECT2
27 - M
 ANAGEMENT OF A REFRIGERANT FLUID LEAK AND LEAK FAULT
DETECTOR

When the option is present on the machine, the P104 parameter allows the BUS connection with the CAREL leak detector(s) to
become operational.
■ P104 :
Access level = 2

P 1 0 4 L E A K D E T E C T I O N
N O
Réglages possibles : OUI ; NON
Valeur par défaut = NON
- Le paramètre P104.1 sert à temporiser la prise en compte de l’information de défaut remontée par le ou les détecteurs de fuites
CAREL
■ P104.1 :
Niveau d’accès = 2
Affichage si P104 = OUI

P 1 0 4 . 1 L E A K D E T E C T I O N
T I M E D E L A Y 1 . 0 m i n
Possible settings: 0 to 5 minutes in increments of 30 seconds
Default value = 1 min

27.1 - Link between the CAREL detector and the controller :

The CAREL detector and the controller are linked through an RS 485 connection using the Modbus protocol by linking to the
MOLEX terminal block available for the last additional card, apart from in the following cases :
- When only the energy management option is present, the connection should be made using the dedicated RS 485 connection
on the DIRIS module.
- When only the variable speed pump option is present, the connection should be made using the dedicated RS 485 connector
on the frequency inverter.
The detector unit should always be the last component in the loop; thus the last CAREL unit in the loop should be equipped with
line termination resistance.
When a machine has two circuits, there will be two detectors linked in series inside the unit provided by CAREL; thus there will
only be one connection between the unit and the regulator.

27.2 - Management of faults when a leak is detected by the CAREL unit if P104 = YES :
In a machine with two circuits, the fault will be managed per circuit.
The fault is managed even when the machine is stopped.
The fault will be taken into account when the detector signals a P104 fault for 1 second.
■ If a fault occurs:
• Staged or forced stop of the compressors in the circuit concerned
- Pump switched on even if "standby mode" is active
• Add to the fault memory
• Machine fault output on
• General fault LED on console lit steady
► Display :

M A C H I N E O F F
C I R C U I T X L E A K F A U L T
■ Resetting :
RESET button.
- Message displayed in the fault memory

C I R C U I T X L E A K F A U L T

27.3 - M
 anagement of faults if communication (bus) with the CAREL unit is lost if P104 =
YES
If the connection between one of the two detectors and the controller is lost for 10 seconds or more, the following message will be
displayed :

L I N K F A U L T
C I R C U I T X D E T E C T O R

CONNECT2 EN-116
27 - M
 ANAGEMENT OF A REFRIGERANT FLUID LEAK AND LEAK FAULT
DETECTOR
■ If a fault occurs
- No staged or forced stop of the compressors in the circuit concerned
- Circuit fault LED flashing
- Fault added to fault memory
- Fault relay stuck
■ Resetting :
Automatic
- Message displayed in the fault memory

L I N K C X D E T E C T O R

27.4 - Management of sensor faults in the CAREL detector if P104 = YES :

If a sensor fault occurs in the detector BUS connection, the following message will be displayed on the controller console :

S E N S O R F A U L T
C I R C U I T X D E T E C T O R
■ If a fault occurs :
- No staged or forced stop of the compressors in the circuit concerned
- Circuit fault LED flashing
- Fault added to fault memory
- Fault relay stuck
■ Resetting :
Automatic
- Message displayed in the fault memory

C X D E T E C T O R S E N S O R

27.5 - Reading parameters :

■ P291 :
- Information delivered by the CAREL detector

P 2 9 1 L E A K D E T E C T E D
I N C I R C U I T 1 Y E S
■ P291.1 :
- Information delivered by the CAREL detector

P 2 9 1 . 1 L E A K D E T E C T E D
I N C I R C U I T 2 Y E S

EN-117 CONNECT2
28 - MANAGEMENT OF ELECTRICAL POWER

Electrical values are measured by means of an external module that is connected to a current transformer and exchanges data
with the controller via bus connection.
When the option is present on the machine, the parameter P 15.1 allows the bus communication with the electrical value measurement
module to become operational.

P 1 5 . 1 E L E C T R I C A L V A L U E
M E A S U R E M E N T S N O
YES; NO
Default value = NO
The parameter P15.2 allows you to control the type of electrical network for the electrical value measurement module

P 1 5 . 2 T Y P E D E R E S E A U
E L E C T R I Q U E S N E T 3 B L
Possible settings: 1BL, 2BL,3BL,3NBL,4BL and 4NBL
Default value = 3 BL
The parameter P 16 allows control of the primary current transformer (CT) rating.
Display if P 15.1 = Yes

P 1 6 P R I M A R Y C T
R A T I N G x x x x x A
Programmable between 5 to 1000 A in increments of 1 with 400 A as the default value
The parameter P 17 allows you to set the secondary current transformer (CT) rating.
Display if P 15.1 = Yes

P 1 7 S E C O N D A R Y C T
R A T I N G 5 A
Can be set to 1 or 5, with 5 A as the default
The parameter P 117 enables access to the power input limit function and selection of its activation mode.
Display if P 15.1 = Yes

P 1 1 7 P O W E R I N P U T
L I M I T A T I O N N O
Possible settings: no, permanent, by on/off input and yes by bus.
Default value = NO
The by on/off input command takes place on terminal block J6, terminals 7-9 of the main board, in which case all other "load
shedding" inputs will be inactive.
The parameter P 118.1 allows control of the value to be considered for load shedding on the power input.
Display if P 117 ≠ No

P 1 1 8 . 1 M A X I M U M P O W E R
L E V E L x x x x K W
Programmable between 15 to 400 kW in increments of 1 with 200 kW as the default value

28.1 - Management of load shedding on a power input threshold :

This function aims to prevent the machine from exceeding the power input threshold set by P118.1, by turning off the control stages.
It is inactive or deactivated in the following cases:
During a defrosting cycle, when reducing the power to the setpoint, in case of an on/off command or automated command, if the
neutral zone is entered (P119 = "Cooling/heating auto by outdoor temperature), in test mode, if there is no communication with the
DIRIS module for 2 minutes.

CONNECT2 EN-118
28 - MANAGEMENT OF ELECTRICAL POWER

28.2 - Reading parameters :

P 2 7 3 . 1 S U P P L Y V O L T .
U 1 : x x x V U 2 : x x x V U 3 : x x x V

P 2 7 4 . 1 M A C H I N E
A B S O R B E D P x x x . x A x . x A

P 2 7 6 . 1 E L E C P O W E R
C O N S U M E D x x x x k W h

P 2 7 5 . 1 M A C H I N E
A B S O R B E D X X X X . X k W

P 2 9 3 P O W E R
M O N I T O R I N G A C T I V E X X X
YES/NO depending on the power load shedding request, regardless of the activation mode.
■ Resetting P 276.1 :
The value in parameter P276.1 displays the total electrical power consumed. The user has the option to reset this counter as
follows:
Once the parameter is displayed, press the applicable button and the following message will appear :

P 2 7 6 . 1 E L E C P O W E R
C O N S U M E D R E S E T
Once the message above to reset the counter is displayed, press the enable button and then press the escape button once the
counter is reset to return to the reading parameter (now set at zero).

P 2 7 6 . 1 E L E C P O W E R
C O N S U M E D 0 0 0 0 0 K W H

28.3 - Display in the Measured values and Machine status menus :

If P15.1 = YES, in addition to the usual measured values, the electrical values appear as follows :

U 1 : X X X V U 2 : X X X V U 3 : X X X V
T O T A L C I N P U T : X X X . X A
T O T A L P I N P U T : X X X . X k W
If load shedding is active in the Machine status menu, the following message will appear :

L O A D S H E D D I N G O N
A B S O R B E D P O W E R

EN-119 CONNECT2
29 - MANAGEMENT OF MAINTENANCE REMINDER DISPLAY

- Maintenance messages can be viewed in the Machine status menu.

They are first displayed one after the other ahead of other types of messages, alongside arrows ↑↓ acknowledging that the
FGAS message has priority.
- Once all the maintenance messages have been shown once, they are moved to the bottom of the Machine status menu behind
other types of messages.
- All the maintenance parameters are regrouped in menu 17 which can be accessed from level 2

1 7 - M A I N T E N A N C E

29.1 - FGAS tightness check reminder :

Parameter P 900 enables activation and regulation of the check frequency

P 9 0 0 F G A S T I G H T N E S S
C H E C K R E M I N D E R N O
Possible setting: no -03-06-12 months
Default value = NO
Visible irrespective of the type of machine.

The count begins when the function is activated

The following message will appear in the Maintenance status menu :

F G A S C H E C K I N X X D
C A L L S T E M A I N T E N A N C E
- The message is displayed:
- 15 days before the provisional date of the check (P900) every 3 months
- 21 days before the provisional date of the check (P900) every 6 or 12 months
The counter decreases each day from the date it was first displayed.
The reminder message will remain on the user interface of the unit until the maintenance operator acknowledges it with the following
parameter:
The parameter P 901 allows the operator to reset the reminder counter

P 9 0 1 R E S E T F G A S
C H E C K
Once the parameter is displayed, press the applicable button and the following message will appear :

P 9 0 1 R E S E T F G A S
C H E C K O K
Visible if P900 ≠ No
Press the enable button to reset the counter, press ESCape once reset is enabled to exit, otherwise the counter will not be reset.
This function will be activated by default ex works.

29.2 - Maintenance reminder :

The "Maintenance reminder" function will be activated independently of the "FGAS tightness check" described above.
The parameter P 910 enables activation of the REMINDER function and regulation of its management mode

P 9 1 0 M A I N T E N A N C E C H E C K
R E M I N D E R N O
Possible settings: no or hours or days or months
Default value = NO
Visible irrespective of the type of machine.
Parameter P 911 allows you to set the REMINDER frequency
■ For reminder (P 910) in hours

P 9 1 1 M A I N T E N A N C E C H E C K
F R E Q U E N C Y x x x x h o u r s
Possible setting: 1 to 9999 hrs
Default value = 2000 hrs

CONNECT2 EN-120
29 - MANAGEMENT OF MAINTENANCE REMINDER DISPLAY

■ For reminder (P 910) in months

P 9 1 1 M A I N T E N A N C E C H E C K
F R E Q U E N C Y x x m o n t h s
Possible setting: 1 to 99 months
Default value = 12 months
The counter starts once the P 911 value is enabled.
If the function is activated, the following message appears in the Maintenance status menu :
■ For reminder (P 910) in months

M A I N T E N A N C E I N X X D
C A L L S T E M A I N T E N A N C E
■ For reminder (P 910) in hours

M A I N T E N A N C E I N X X X h r s
C A L L S T E M A I N T E N A N C E
The message is displayed :
■ For reminder in months:
10 days before the provisional date of the check if P 912 < 3 months
20 days before the provisional date of the check if 3 ≤ P 912 < 6 months
20 days before the provisional date of the check if P 912 ≥ 6 months
■ For reminder in hours:
150 hrs before the provisional date of the check if P 912 < 1000 hrs.
300 hrs before the provisional date of the check if 1000 hrs ≤ P 912 < 2000 hrs.
300 hrs before the provisional date of the check if P 912 ≥ 2000 hrs.
The counter progresses every hour or month from the moment it was first displayed up to the scheduled date.
The reminder message remains on the user interface of the unit until the maintenance operator acknowledges it in the following
manner:
The parameter P 912 allows the operator to reset the reminder counter

P 9 1 2 R E S E T M A I N T E N A N C E
C H E C K
Once the parameter is displayed, press the enable button and the following message will appear :

P 9 1 2 R E S E T M A I N T E N A N C E
C H E C K O K
- Visible if P910 ≠ No
Press the enable button to reset the counter, press ESCape once reset is enabled to exit, otherwise the counter will not be reset.
This function will not be activated ex works

29.3 - Useful information for both functions :

When the count reaches the scheduled maintenance date, the general fault LED flashes and the fault relay is triggered until the
counter is reset
If the count is in months, precision is specified in days.
In the event that the hour or date is changed after activating a reminder function, the one that was set at the time of activation is
taken into account for starting the count. This means that if the set date is shifted towards the end date of the count, the count
values will decrease (function test)
By contrast, if there is a large shift between the date and hour displayed by the controller and the real values, after being set, it is
makes more sense to reset the counters for maintenance functions.
The data linked to the periodic maintenance checks described above is available on the controller bus (customer access bits), and
can therefore return to the levels of BMS/CMS, apart from the counter resets.
The data will also return to supervision level.

EN-121 CONNECT2
30 - COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL

1 - Communication medium. 2 - Transmission mode via Ethernet

■ RS485 ■ RJ45,
3-pin connector on J11 terminal 1: A or +
terminal 2: B or – Very important : 1 single simultaneous Ethernet
terminal 3: connected to earth connection is supported.
for shielding if desired
Two lights provide information on the status of the transmission In all cases, the link between the controller and the CMS functions
(see Section 3.1, control board) : via a crossover cable. Use of a straight cable depends on the
- D50 → Receive LED. Usually off; flashes when a message CMS
is received by the board. - The IP address is set via parameter P711
- The sub-net mask is set via parameter P712
If this light remains on, the bus is reversed. Swap terminals 1
- The port address is set via parameter P713
and 2 on J11.
- D52 → Send LED. Usually off; lights up when the CPU sends ■ Coding of analogue values.
a message over the bus. Standard 32-bit IEEE format (2 registers).
■ Transmission mode. Order of values:
■ Serial, asynchronous, half duplex, RTU mode. - If P714 = NO → low order, high order
- 1 start bit, - Si P714 = Yes → high order, low order
- 8 data bits, Note : the write functions are enabled if parameter P715 is
- The parity is set via parameter P702, set to "Remote, CMS…”
- The number of stop bits is set via parameter P703, ■ 3 - Supported functions
- The transmission speed is set via parameter P701,
- The unit number on the bus is set via parameter P705. ■ Function codes used.
■ Coding of analogue values. 1 or 2: read n bits

Standard 32-bit IEEE format (2 registers). 3 or 4: read multiple registers (16 bits)
5: write one bit function…………..
Order of values.
6: write register function………
Ordre des valeurs :
- If P704 = No → low order, high order. 8:
- Si P704 = Yes → high order, low order. 11:
Note: the write functions are enabled if parameter P706 is 15: write n bits function
set to "Remote, CMS…" 16: write multiple registers (16 bits) function
■ Function codes used. Note : lthe write functions are enabled if parameter P103 is
1 or 2: read n bits set to "Remote, BMS…”
3 or 4: read multiple registers (16 bits) ■ Error codes :
5: write one bit ………….. 1: function code unknown
6: write register function……… 2: address incorrect
8: read diagnostics counters 3: data error
11: read event counter
15: write n bits
16: write multiple registers (16 bits)
Note: the write functions are enabled if parameter P103 is
set to "Remote, BMS…)
■ Error codes :
1: function code unknown
2: address incorrect
3: data error

CONNECT2 EN-122
30 - COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL

30.1 - Registers accessible by customer

Register No. Register No.

Description Format Type
hexadecimal decimal

Registers accessible in read-only mode (Functions 3 or 4)

33 = Chiller/heat pump
0x01 1 Controller name Decimal Read-only controller
0x02 2 Actual operating mode Decimal Read-only
0x3 and 0x4 3 and 4 Outdoor temperature Float Read-only
0x5 and 0x6 5 and 6 Control setpoint Float Read-only
0x7 and 0x8 7 and 8 Evaporator inlet temperature Float Read-only
0x9 and 0xa 9 and 10 Evaporator outlet temperature Float Read-only
0xb and 0xc 11 and 12 Condenser temperature Float Read-only
Available with versions 09.00
0x13 19 Number of stages on Char Read-only and higher
0x20 and 0x21 32 and 33 P285 Heating mode runtime (in hours) Float Read-only
0x22 and 0x23 34 and 35 P286 Cooling mode runtime (in hours) Float Read-only
0x24 and 0x25 36 and 37 P287 Pump 1 runtime (in hours) Float Read-only
0x26 and 0x27 38 and 39 P288 Pump 2 runtime (in hours) Float Read-only
0x28 and 0x29 40 and 41 P310 Number of starts, stage 1, circuit 1 Float Read-only
0x2a and 0x2b 42 and 43 P311 Stage 1, circuit 1 runtime Float Read-only
0x2c and 0x2d 44 and 45 P313 Number of starts, stage 2, circuit 1 Float Read-only
0x2e and 0x2f 46 and 47 P314 Stage 2, circuit 1 runtime Float Read-only
0x30 and 0x31 48 and 49 P340 Number of starts, stage 1, circuit 2 Float Read-only
0x32 and 0x33 50 and 51 P341 Stage 1, circuit 2 runtime Float Read-only
0x34 and 0x35 52 and 53 P343 Number of starts, stage 2, circuit 2 Float Read-only
0x36 and 0x37 54 and 55 P344 Stage 2, circuit 2 runtime Float Read-only
0x50 and 0x51 80 and 81 Voltage between phase 1 and 2 Float Read-only V
0x52 and 0x53 82 and 83 Voltage between phase 2 and 3 Float Read-only V
0x54 and 0x55 84 and 85 Voltage between phase 1 and 3 Float Read-only V
0x68 and 0x69 104 and 105 Input current Float Read-only A
0x6a and 0x6b 106 and 107 Instantaneous power consumption Float Read-only kW
0x6c and 0x6d 108 and 109 Electrical power consumed Float Read-only kWh
0x6e 110 No. of days before F gas tightness check Decimal Read-only
0x6f 111 No. of days or hours before maintenance Decimal Read-only
Registers accessible in read mode (Functions 3 or 4) and write mode (Function 16)
0x101 and 0x102 257 and 258 P121 Cooling setpoint 1 Float Read/Write
0x103 and 0x104 259 and 260 P122 Cooling setpoint 2 Float Read/Write
0x105 and 0x106 261 and 262 P123 Heating setpoint 1 Float Read/Write
0x107 and 0x108 263 and 264 P124 Heating setpoint 2 Float Read/Write
0x109 and 0x10a 265 and 266 P125,1 Setpoint for 4 mA in cooling mode Float Read/Write
0x10b and 0x10c 267 and 268 P125,2 Setpoint for 4 mA in heating mode Float Read/Write
0x10d and 0x10e 269 and 270 P126,1 Setpoint for 20 mA in cooling mode Float Read/Write
0x10f and 0x110 271 and 272 P126,2 Setpoint for 20 mA in heating mode Float Read/Write
0x116 278 P910 Maintenance check reminder Decimal Read/Write
Hours if P910 is in hours
0x117 279 P911 Maintenance check frequency Usi Read/Write Months if P910 is in months
Registers accessible in read mode (Functions 3 or 4) and write mode (Functions 6 or 16)
0x200 512 Year Decimal Read/Write 0 to 99
0x201 513 Month Decimal Read/Write 1 to 12
0x202 514 Day of the month Decimal Read/Write 1 to 31
1 to 7 (1: Monday, 2: Tuesday,
0x203 515 Day of the week Decimal Read/Write etc.)
0x204 516 Hour Decimal Read/Write 0 to 23
0x205 517 Minutes Decimal Read/Write 0 to 59

EN-123 CONNECT2
30 - COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL

30.2 - Customer access bits

Bit No.
Hexadecimal bit No. Description Type
decimal

Read-only bit (functions 1 or 2)

0x01 1 P103 Control type Read-only 0: Local, 1: Remote
0x02 2 Operating summary (On/Off and automatic operation input closed) Read-only 1 = On
0x03 3 State of pump 1 output Read-only 1 = On
0x04 4 State of pump 2 output Read-only 1 = On
0x05 5 Output state, stage 1, circuit 1 Read-only 1 = on
0x06 6 Output state, stage 2, circuit 1 Read-only 1 = On
0x07 7 Output state, stage 1, circuit 2 Read-only 1 = On
0x08 8 Output state, stage 2, circuit 2 Read-only 1 = On
0x09 9 State of auxiliary electric heater 1 or boiler Read-only 1 = On
0x0a 10 State of auxiliary electric heater 2 Read-only 1 = On
0x0b 11 State of auxiliary electric heater 3 Read-only 1 = On
0x0c 12 State of auxiliary electric heater 4 Read-only 1 = On
0x0d to 0x0f reserved
0x10 16 General fault summary (1 fault below present) Read-only 1 = Fault
0x11 17 Phase controller fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x12 18 Water flow fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x13 19 Pump 1 fault
0x14 20 Pump 2 fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x15 21 Pump fault, 1 loop Read-only 1 = Fault
0x16 22 Pump fault, 2 loops Read-only 1 = Fault
0x17 23 Heat exchanger inlet sensor fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x18 24 Heat exchanger outlet sensor fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x19 25 Outdoor temperature sensor fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x1a 26 Condenser sensor fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x1b 27 Manifold outlet sensor fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x1c 28 Fan fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x1d 29 EEPROM FAULT Read-only 1 = Fault
0x1e 30 Inlet loop fault sensor (MULTI CHILLER/HEAT PUMP controller) Read-only 1 = Fault
0x1f 31 Outlet loop fault sensor (MULTI CHILLER/HEAT PUMP controller) Read-only 1 = Fault
0x20 32 AÉRO controller link fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x21 33 Outdoor temperature too high in cooling mode Read-only 1 = Fault
0x22 34 Change of operating mode fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x23 35 Winter protection Read-only 1 = Fault
0x24 36 Exchanger ambient sensor fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x25 to 0x3f reserved
0x40 64 Circuit 1 fault summary Read-only 1 = Fault
0x41 65 Stage 1, circuit 1 fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x42 66 Stage 2, circuit 1 fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x43 67 Manual HP fault, circuit 1 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x44 68 HP fault, circuit 1 pressure sensor Read-only 1 = Fault
0x45 69 Circuit 1 LP fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x46 70 Water frosting fault, circuit 1 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x47 71 Refrigerant frosting fault, circuit 1 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x48 72 Exchanger frosting fault, circuit 1 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x49 73 Discharge fault, stage 1, circuit 1 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x4a 74 Discharge fault, stage 2, circuit 1 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x4b 75 Defrosting fault, circuit 1 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x4c 76 Expansion valve fault, circuit 1 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x4d 77 Stepper motor fault, circuit 1 expansion valve Read-only 1 = Fault
0x4e 78 Low superheat fault, circuit 1 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x4f 79 High superheat fault, circuit 1 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x50 80 VCM module fault, expansion valve 1 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x51 81 Exchanger outlet sensor fault, circuit 1 Read-only 1 = Fault

CONNECT2 EN-124
30 - COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL

Bit No.
Hexadecimal bit No. Description Type
decimal

0x52 82 Exchanger freon sensor fault, circuit 1 Read-only 1 = Fault

0x53 83 Sensor fault, coil A, circuit 1 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x54 84 Sensor fault, coil B, circuit 1 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x55 85 Sensor fault, coil C, circuit 1 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x56 86 Sensor fault, coil D, circuit 1 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x57 87 Discharge sensor fault, stage 1, circuit 1 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x58 88 Discharge sensor fault, stage 2, circuit 1 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x59 89 Circuit 1 HP sensor fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x5a 90 Circuit 1 LP sensor fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x5b 91 Circuit 1 suction sensor fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x5c 92 Circuit 1 liquid sensor fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x5d 93 Circuit 1 exp. valve board link fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x5e 94 Link fault, additional board for reversible Read-only 1 = Fault
0x5f 95 Tsat discharge fault, Inverter compressor Read-only 1 = Fault
0x60 96 Mechanical fault, Inverter compressor Read-only 1 = Fault
0x61 to 0x7f reserved
0x80 128 Load shedding, stage 1, circuit 1 Read-only 1 = Load shedding
0x81 129 Load shedding, stage 2, circuit 1 Read-only 1 = Load shedding
0x82 to 0x9f reserved
0x100 256 Circuit 2 fault summary Read-only 1 = Fault
0x101 257 Stage 1, circuit 2 fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x102 258 Stage 2, circuit 2 fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x103 259 Manual HP fault, circuit 2 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x104 260 HP fault, circuit 2 pressure sensor Read-only 1 = Fault
0x105 261 Circuit 2 LP fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x106 262 Water frosting fault, circuit 2 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x107 263 Refrigerant frosting fault, circuit 2 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x108 264 Exchanger frosting fault, circuit 2 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x109 265 Discharge fault, stage 1, circuit 2 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x10a 266 Discharge fault, stage 2, circuit 2 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x10b 267 Defrosting fault, circuit 2 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x10c 268 Expansion valve fault, circuit 2 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x10d 269 Stepper motor fault, circuit 2 expansion valve Read-only 1 = Fault
0x10e 270 Low superheat fault, circuit 2 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x10f 271 High superheat fault, circuit 2 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x110 272 VCM module fault, expansion valve 2 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x111 273 Exchanger outlet sensor fault, circuit 2 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x112 274 Exchanger freon sensor fault, circuit 2 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x113 275 Sensor fault, coil A, circuit 2 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x114 276 Sensor fault, coil B, circuit 2 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x115 277 Sensor fault, coil C, circuit 2 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x116 278 Sensor fault, coil D, circuit 2 Read-only 1 = Fault
0x117 279 Stage 1, circuit 2 discharge sensor fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x118 280 Stage 2, circuit 2 discharge sensor fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x119 281 Circuit 2 HP sensor fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x11a 282 Circuit 2 LP sensor fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x11b 283 Circuit 2 suction sensor fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x11c 284 Circuit 2 liquid sensor fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x11d 285 Circuit 2 exp. valve board link fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x11e 286 Link fault, additional board for reversible Read-only 1 = Fault
0x11f to 0x13f reserved
0x140 320 Load shedding, stage 1, circuit 2 Read-only 1 = Load shedding
0x141 321 Load shedding, stage 2, circuit 2 Read-only 1 = Load shedding
0x142 322 Fgas maintenance to be performed Read-only 1 = Maintenance required
0x143 323 Fgas maintenance fault Read-only 1 = Fault
0x144 324 Maintenance to be performed Read-only 1 = Maintenance required
0x145 325 Maintenance fault Read-only 1 = Fault

EN-125 CONNECT2
30 - COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL

Bit No.
Hexadecimal bit No. Description Type
decimal

Read (Functions 1 or 2) and write (Functions 5 or 15) bit

0x200 512 On/Off Read/Write 1 = On
0x201 513 Control set to setpoint 1 or 2 Read/Write 1 = Control set to setpoint 2
0x202 514 Heating or cooling operation Read/Write 1 = Heating
0x203 515 Load shedding via Modbus, stage 1, circuit 1 (different from 0 x 140) Read/Write 1 = Off
0x204 516 Load shedding via Modbus, stage 2, circuit 1 Read/Write 1 = Off
0x205 517 Load shedding via Modbus, stage 1, circuit 2 Read/Write 1 = Off
0x206 518 Load shedding via Modbus, stage 2, circuit 2 Read/Write 1 = Off
Read bit (Functions 1 or 2) → Available with versions 09.00 and higher
On/Off summary (1 = keypad on/off = 1 and all automaic operation controls
0x220 544 Read-only
closed and no oil warm-up time and no faults)
0x221 545 1 = Cooling possible Read-only
0x222 546 1 = Heating possible Read-only
0x223 547 1 = 1 stage on Read-only
0x224 548 1 = Maximum available power reached Read-only
0x225 549 1 = A major fault preventing output has occurred Read-only
0x226 550 1 = A reset fault has occurred but output is possible Read-only
0x227 551 1 = A fault requiring servicing has occurred Read-only

CONNECT2 EN-126
EN-127 CONNECT2
Manufacturer: Carrier SCS, Montluel, France. Printed in the European Union.
Manufacturer reserves the right to change any product specifications without notice.